Home

Intermec 6710 User's Manual

1. 2 cece eee ee eee 4 70 Deferral Slot and Fairness Slot 4 70 Fragment Size 0 eee 4 71 Transmit Mode 10 ccc ccc cece eee eas 4 72 Norm Ack Retry 0 2 4 72 Frag ACK REY ss 085 tink Peta dares ciated 4 73 Norm QFSK Retry 0 000 e cece eee ees 4 73 Frag QFSK Retry 0c cece eee eee es 4 73 900 MHZ Options 0 nh 4 74 File Nairme iore puce ee de cba ran 4 74 Mode Channel ssssssee eee ees 4 74 6710 Access PointUser s Guide v CONTENTS vi S HEF Optlons 225 6 25 02 Beda on ban iw ehh iv eder File Natrie casa ie dias saad ba Sale eta ACA dae Call Sign aie aurri er pes wees Ghd Ped poe ea ae Freguency ou Bad tit dente te eden bia Sar ef A ake Master Mode ccc cece cece cee e eet ene Attach Priority 0 00 cece cece OWL IP Options 0 0 0 0 00 eee OVERVIEW tes 2s Nace aor CO wa slated aaa e ee RC EU OWL IP Menu sssss RH HII Mode eo actex e cde EE A ARR nd IP Addresses oo ace cece ete a AA WY PO vedas see attt ite stave cata ae coe Ra Address rex ree nex Cite MX Filter zniuEmeeidP rexenedea ace doa REO Security OptionS 0 cece eee Password rectores aaa weet wakes ts Service Password 6 cece eee Advanced Password ee eee enna Combining Radio Options cee eee eee Same LAN IDs niei Mechs Dino eo Different LAN IDs ssssesee eens Creating a Web
2. sssse TCP IP Options IP Address IP Subnet Mask IP Router IP FrameType DHCP gens DHCP Server Name sse n n nn Bootp Operatio Networks With Handshaking Infinite Leases Auto ARP Minutes Vct reb etes aceites ants DHCP and Bootp Servers 6710 Access PointUser s Guide QJ QJ QJ QJ QJ QJ QJ QJ QJ QJ GJ GU QU NH BHBHmBHmBHBmpmpuumb CODMNNDWWWNHKEHPO 4 1 4 2 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 7 4 8 4 12 4 12 4 14 4 16 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 19 4 22 CONTENTS iv Bridge Options Serial Number LanID Root Root Priority Super Root Super Root Super Root Global Radio Candidates Lus Selection ere iE e ed Redundancy uusuu Set Globally 0 00 eee eee eee eee Value Global Flooding ccc cece eee e eens Inbound Outbound to Secondaries s Outbound to Stations 0 cae Flooding Level S UHF Floodin Flood Register ARP Server Mode Ports Name MAC Address Status Hello Period Ethernet Options OWL Frame Type Cable Type Static Addresses Normal RX Filter F rame Types SubTypes 1 User Defined S Checklist serari aaa gLevel ssssss ubtypes in SubTypes 1 and SubTypes2 seeeesess Filtering Examples ssseeeseeee Exam
3. vlConfig 2 Row Definition communi tyEntry OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX CommunityEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Each entry relates to a specific community amp associates to it access privileges NDEX communi tyl ndex communityTable 1 Columnar Object Definition 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 53 APPENDIXG M B Communi tyEntry SEQUENCE communitylndex NTEGER communityStatus NTEGER communi t y Na me DisplayString communi tyPrivileges NTEGER Leaf Definition communitylndex 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Identifies the community row communityEntry 1 communityStatus 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER enabled 1 disabled 2 deleted 3 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Status of a community record Alterations to the table may only be performed by a manager using the SUPER USER community name Status types Enabled Community record active Disabled Community record not active Deleted Disables and nulls objects in record communityEntry 2 communi t yName 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 15 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The authoritative name for the community Unless the Norand SUPER USER community name is employed a GET from this column yields an access violation communityEntry 3 G 54 6710 Ac
4. By default the Service Password is enabled If setting a service password violates your security guidelines you can disable it If it is already disabled and you forget the configuration menus password you may need to send this access point to a Service Center to be reconfigured Contact the Customer Response Center for more information about the service password See the Preface for contact information 4 86 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Advanced Password When you set an advanced password it is required to configure the following Security Advanced Password and Bridge Ports omdip The prompt is Range is 16 chars Enter 16 or fewer alphanumeric characters for this password It is case insensitive and can be any combination of letters numbers and symbols For security the password appears as asterisks on the screen Combining Radio Options You can combine WLIF 900 MHz and S UHF radios in a common network by following basic guidelines for LAN ID Two alternatives are possible same LAN ID and different LAN IDs Same LAN ID Using the same LAN ID for all radio options configures all access points into a single network regardless of radio type This approach allows management of a single network using the OWLView network management application An Ethernet path or wireless hop must exist from all access points to the super root and back up super root candidates In addition
5. S UHF Specifications and Antennas Frequencies Wireless Stations 1 32 2 60 3 80 4 100 Installation Guidelines The following pages contain guidelines for predicting the coverage area and installing single and multiple access points Predicting Coverage Table D 1 shows predicted indoor coverage areas for an access point with the S UHF radio The table was generated using a mathematical mode Areas are in square meters For square feet multiply the area in square meters by 10 Table D 1 Coverage Prediction Increased Coverage Overlap Between Access Points gt gt gt Increased obstructions 120K 100K 80K 64K 100K 84K 64K 51K 82K 68K 52K 42K 68K 56K 43K 34K Theextremes of 120K and 34K square meters are indicative of best and worst case coverage results using this modd Reflects typical expected coverage for industrial and ware housing applications 6710 Access PointUser s Guide D 5 APPENDIXD S UHF Specifications and Antennas Installing a Single Access Point You can install a single access point when wireless station populations system transaction rates and coverage requirements permit Following are some factors to consider For large coverage areas it is necessary to locate the access point optimally to maximize coverage At sites where the structure and operations within provide a uniform RF signal propagation environment the location is generally centralized within t
6. nifxlnFragDiscards OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of received frame fragments discarded because a fragmented frame could not be re assembl ed nifxEntry 11 nifxlnUFilterDiscards OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of enabled received unicast frames discarded due to a unicast filter expression nifxEntry 12 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 35 APPENDIXG M B nifxlnNUFilterDiscards OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of enabled received multicast frames discarded due to a multicast filter expression nifxEntry 13 nif xl nQFullDiscards OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of received frames discarded because the frame could not be queued for the MAC R task nifxEntry 14 portState OBJECT IDENTIFIER ninterfaces 3 The Port State Table psTable 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF PSEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R port state variables portState 4 psEntry 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX PSEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX psPort psTable 1 G 36 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB PSEntry 5 SEQUENCE psPort NTEGER psi flndex NTEGER psAddress
7. 3 Plugthe end of another Ethernet coaxial cable segment into the other open end of the T connector 3 12 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION3 Installation lOBASE5 Ethernet The access point connects to TLOBASE 5 through an N Series transceiver or vampire tap Cable lengths between network devices on the 10BASE5 Ethernet LAN must meet ANSI IEEE standards N Series Transceiver SeeFigure 3 9 and the following procedure 1 Attach one end of the drop cable 1 to the AUI port 2 Route the drop cable to the 1OBASE5 cable 4 and determine a suitable spot to cut the cable and attach the transceiver 3 3 Attach the transceiver to the LOBASE5 cable then connect the other end of the drop cabletothe AUI port 2 on the transceiver Vampire Tap See Figure 3 10 and the following procedure 1 2 3 Attach one end of the drop cable 1 to the AUI port Route the drop cable to the LOBASE5 cable and determine a suitable spot on the cable to attach the vampire tap 3 Attach the vampire tap to the 10BASE5 cable then connect the other end of the drop cabletothe AUI port 2 on the tap 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 3 13 SECTION3 Installation 10BASE jopaspT DIAG JADE AC INPUT 100 240 VAC Drop cable 15 pin AUI port N Series transceiver 10BASE5 coax PUN Figure 3 9 N Series Transceiver 3 14 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION3 Installation O cap t
8. Flood Register Di sabl ed gt Bridge Priority The bridge priority allows selection of the access point serving as a designated bridge for a secondary LAN As with the root priority the bridge priority allows designation of access points as primary or fallback bridges The prompt is Range is 0 7 The S UHF radio option does not support designated bridging Designated Bridge Candidates Access points with a bridge priority between 1 default and 7 are candidates to become the designated bridge access points with a bridge priority of 0 are prohibited from bridging The access point with the highest bridge priority other than 0 becomes the designated bridge whenever it is connected powered on and active to the secondary LAN If two access points have the same bridge priority the access point with the highest Ethernet address becomes the designated bridge However a lower bridge priority access point may become the designated bridge if the wireless link to a higher bridge priority access point is unacceptable 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 57 SECTION 4 Configuration Designated Bridge Selection If the current designated bridge goes offline the remaining candidates negotiate to determine which one becomes the new designated bridge Summary In summary the designated bridge Physically connects to a secondary Ethernet LAN Is within the radio coverage area of an access point on the distribution LAN H
9. cece eee eee Part Numbers Antenna Regulations 0 cece eee Whip Antenna Remote Antenna Kits 0 ccc cece A APPENDIX D S UHF Specifications and Antennas RM111 Radio Operation sssssssseeeeeeeee Part Numbers Wireless Hops Antenna Connector Whip Antennas SiteLicense Technology Transaction Rates 6710 Access Point User s Guide Uu LI WWWDWDWWWWWWWWWW O Ui i amp amp UU U U QJ N N LP QOUUUUUCUUOU g RR UUUUN NH ix CONTENTS Installation Guidelines 0 0c cee eee eee Predicting Coverage 00 eee Installing a Single Access Point Installing Multiple Access Points Extending Coverage sssseeees Reusing the Frequency ssssseeeees Increasing System Throughput Opt OI sit o e ep E eR DIa ike 2 vies oue teet npe eds Frequency and Separation Guidelines APPENDIX E OML IP iii cis cca erre aka aa eom nn iain e RC n Introduction ssepe emer PETERE RERO OWL IP Restrictions 0 0 cece eee Addressing Limitations 000000ee Installation Limitations sss OWL IP Safeguards 00 cece eee Default Settings 0 c cece Addressing Limitations and Flooding Restrictions Permanent Filters Default Filter Settings sssseesssesse
10. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 For the WLIF radio to wireless hop at least one access point on the secondary LAN must be equipped with a WLIF radio configured for Slave mode The secondary LAN can be one of the following 4 66 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION4 Configuration An Ethernet segment The radio range of a single access point with two radios One radio must be operating as a Master to service wireless station traffic The other radio must be operating as a Slaveto provide the wireless hop to the distribution LAN You must set the Root Priority for the access point with the Slave radio to 0 to prevent it from becoming the open wireless LAN super root You must prevent the access point with the Slave radio from synchronizing with Master radios in access points attached to the same secondary LAN To identify the Masters with which the Slave is allowed to synchronize do the following 1 Identify eight or fewer Master stations with which the Slave is allowed to synchronize by selecting Master lt numbe gt Enter the channel and subchannel pairs that you set for Channel and Subchannel as follows Channel 1 Subchannel 1 Setting Description Channel Channel the Master WLIF radiois using default is 1 Subchannel Subchannel the Master WLIF radiois using default is 1 Channel and Subchannel are discussed on page 4 62 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 67 SECTION 4 Configuration
11. Configuration Wireless Hops To create a wireless hop you must enable one or more WLIF radios on the distribution LAN as wireless hopping Masters and then configure the Slave stations through Slave Parms to connect to these Masters EXAMPLE In Figure 4 4 two access points have two WLIF radios One radio is configured as a Master to provide the wireless connection to the distribution LAN The other radio is configured as a Slave to service wireless station traffic ER Ethernet Distribution LAN Master Secondary LAN Secondary LAN Figure 4 4 Wireless Hopping Through WLIF Radios NOTE For best performance use one or two external antenna kits when using two WLIF radios A minimum separation of 10 feet 3 meters between antennas is required 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 65 SECTION 4 Configuration Settings for the Master are Enabl ed Di sabled Setting Description Enabled Sets up this access point s radio port to wireless hop This access point honors connections from an access point with a Slave radio Disabled Prevents this access point s radio port from default wireless hopping This access point does not honor connections from an access point with a Slave radio Slave Parms Slave Parms contains parameters this radio needs when you configure it as a Slaveradio Options are Channel Subchannel Master 1 Master Master Master Master Master Master Master cc c cc 0 Oc Oo rn
12. OID Object Name Object Type Access 1 1 1 ptxqPort INTEGER read 1 1 2 ptxqRegQSize Gauge read 1 13 ptxqRegQM ax INTEGER read 1 1 4 ptxqExpQSize Gauge read 1 1 5 ptxqExpQM ax INTEGER read 1 1 6 ptxqQHpCount Counter read 1 1 7 ptxqQE xpCount Counter read 1 1 8 ptxqQRegCount Counter read 1 1 9 ptxqQHpDiscards Counter read 1 1 10 ptxqQE xpDiscards Counter read 1 1 11 ptxqQRegDiscards Counter read 1 1 12 ptxqM ultiQSize Gauge read 1 1 13 ptxqM ulti QM ax INTEGER read 1 1 14 ptxqM ultiQDiscards Counter read 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 15 APPENDIXG MIB Table G 14 pmsg GROUP Device Pending Message Service norand manage norandN et nl nterfaces pmsg x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 2 6 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 1 1 1 pmsgPort INTEGER read 1 1 2 pmsgPendRecCurrent Gauge read 1 1 3 pmsgP endR ecM ax INTEGER read 1 1 4 pmsgPendM sgCurrent Gauge read 1 1 5 pmsgPendM sgM ax INTEGER read 1 1 6 pmsgPendM sgTotal Counter read 1 1 7 pmsgPendM soDiscards Counter read 1 1 8 pmsgPendRecOverflowErrors Counter read 1 1 9 pmsgPendM sgOverflowErrors Counter read 1 1 10 pmsgP endAgedRecCount Counter read 1 1 11 pmsgP endAgedM sgCount Counter read G 16 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB SNMP Version 1 Configuration Group This group contains objects that configure the version 1 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent NOTE The MIB definition for each group
13. Terminate SetActivePointers Next Power UpTi me File ommand Usethe SDVars command to display the following arguments Argument Description Get Get software download object Set Set software download object value Display this help Usethe Set argument with a range of software download variables To display the variables type File gt sdvars set The following variables are supported Description serveripaddress ip address scriptfilename filename filename can include path starttime dd hh mmss days hours minutes seconds status is read only checkpoint value terminate stop the current software download setactivepointers none boot data both nextpowerupti me dd hh mm ss days hours minutes second Display this help Usethe Get argument to display the value you enter for a variable 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 17 SECTION 5 EXAMPLE EXAMPLE Software Download ServerlpAddress Serverl pAddress contains the P address of the TFTP server to useto retrieve the download script file This address is also used when you specify an asterisk as the IP address of thetftp get ortftp put command The format of the Serverl pAddress variable is File sdvars set serveripaddress ip address This command line sets the IP address of the server to 1 2 3 4 File sdvars set serveripaddress 1 2 3 4 ScriptFilename ScriptFilename contains the file n
14. 6710 Access Point User s Guide 5 1 SECTION5 Software Download When you reboot the access point the data files load into the radio module Note that the WLIF radio does not have a data file Active and Inactive Segments The access point can have an active boot and data segment as well as an inactive boot and data segment The inactive segment is where you can download a new file The active segment contains the files that are loaded at boot time An active boot segment pointer and an active data segment pointer point to the appropriate active segments The segment not pointed to by one of these active pointers is the inactive boot or data segment After you load an inactive segment with a new file you can change the active pointers to the segment that holds the new file You then reboot the access point so the changes take effect At this point the following occur The access point is running the new version of software The segment holding the new files is now the active segment The old version of software is in an inactive segment NOTE If the active segment is empty when you reboot the access point you must establish a new session through the DIAG port to reload the access point with software 5 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION5 Software Download RAM Segment The file system supports a fifth segment known as the RAM segment The RAM segment is similar to the other
15. Exit FD The FD command displays the segment allocation table and file directory See Fd Command on page 5 6 for more information FE lt s all gt FE erases specified or all segments of FLASH memory See F e Command on page 5 8 for more information 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 25 SECTION5 Software Download FI FI is a destructive command that erases all downloaded files in FLASH memory FSsn FS is a destructive command that redefines the default factory set file segments in FLASH memory FBs FB s designates which segment s of FLASH memory the boot program is located in If the access point boot program is located in a segment other than what is designated the boot program will not run See Fb Command on page 5 5 for more information FFR f FFR f runs the specified file f The file specified with the FFR command must be an executable file FPC fs FPC f s copies a specified file f from an SRAM card installed in PC card slot NIC2 to a specified segment s of the access point F LASH NOTE The FPC fs command copies the first file of the specified file name it finds Attempting to load multiple files with the same file name will result in unreachable or unreadable files FPD FPD shows the file system directory of an installed SRAM card The card must be inserted in PC card slot NI C2 on the access point The FPD command will not work on a card inserted in slot NIC1 The followin
16. PROCOMM PLUS by DataStorm Technologies I nc Install the program according to its user guide PC personal computer station which should meet the requirements outlined in the user guide for the terminal emulation program Cable to connect the PC to the access point s DIAG port The following chart lists cables 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 3 5 SECTION3 Installation For this PC Port Use Cable Part Number 9 pin 226 106 001 null modem cable 25 pin 321 355 001 Telnet You need the following to access the configuration menus through a Telnet session PC or workstation with an installed and configured network interface card and a Telnet application You can also use a host capable of acting as a Telnet client Telnet VT emulator TNVT installed on the PC P address for the access point See Section 4 for more information about I P addresses Web Browser The access point s configuration menus are designed for HTML Level 2 0 or higher You need the following to access the configuration menus through a Web browser Graphical browser application nternet or local network connection P address for the access point See Section 4 for more information about I P addresses Network Management Platform To manage the system through a network management platform you need the platform such as OpenView for Windows by Hewlett Packard installed on a network management station using SNMP The station must meet the r
17. Pass Unlisted DI X I PX Sockets Pass Unlisted DIX Other EtherTypes lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt SNAP IP TCP Ports Pass Unlisted SNAP IP UDP Ports Pass Unlisted SNAP IP Other Protocols Pass Unlisted SNAP IPX Sockets Pass Unlisted SNAP Other EtherTypes Pass lt Unlisted gt 802 3 I PX Sockets Pass Unlisted 802 2 I PX Sockets Pass Unlisted 802 2 Other SAPs Pass Unlisted 4 44 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE Frame Type DIX IP TCP Ports DIX IP UDP Ports SNAP IP TCP Ports SNAP IP UDP Ports DIX IP Other Protocols SNAP IP Other Protocols DIX IPX Sockets SNAP IPX Sockets 802 3 IPX Sockets DIX Other EtherTypes SNAP Other EtherTypes 802 2 IPX Sockets 802 2 Other SAPs SECTION4 Configuration Description Primary Internet Protocol Suite IP transport protocols IP protocols other than TCP or User Datagram Protocol UDP Novell NetWare protocol DIX or SNAP registered protocols other than IP or IPX Novell running over 802 2LLC SAPs other than IPX or SNAP Some IP protocol ports cannot be filtered because they are used for configuration and management of the access point These include HTTP Telnet SNMP and Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Filters set for these protocols are ignored for the Ethernet frame type configured in the access point s Tcpip menu Frame types have the following settings Action Scope Set
18. TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Total unicast relay packets sent pstcEntry 14 pstcOutNUcastRelayPkts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Total multicast relay packets sent pstcEntry 15 pstci nUcasti nbound 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Received unicast data packets routed inbound or relayed onto the distribution LAN pstcEntry 16 pstci nUcastOutbound 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Received unicast data packets routed outbound pstcEntry 17 pstcl nUcastSec 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Recei ved unicast data packets relayed to a secondary LAN pstcEntry 18 G 44 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB pstci nUcastFl ood 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Received unicast data packets with an unknown destination pstcEntry 19 pstclnUcastDiscards OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Recei ved unicast data packets discarded pstcEntry 20 pstci nNUcastDi scar ds 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Recei ved multicast data packets discarded pstcEntry 21 pstcl nUcastTol FC 0BJ ECT TYPE SYN
19. automatically reconfigure the network to maintain reliable operation as devices are added or removed or in the event of some types of wired LAN failure The spanning tree provides efficient loop free forwarding of frames through the network and rapid roaming of mobile stations within the network The spanning tree is initiated by the super root an access point that coordinates the network and distributes common system parameters to other access points and stations The super root is elected from a group of access points designated at the time of installation The election process also occurs in the event of a super root failure preventing a single point of failure Forwarding The bridge maintains a forwarding database of all physical station addresses known to the access point and the correct port for each address This database makes efficient forwarding decisions in the bridging software The database is updated through monitoring addresses on each port and by messages exchanged between access points when stations roam The database also includes the power management status of each station supporting the pending message feature of the network Pending Messages Wireless stations may use power management to maintain battery life These stations wake up periodically to receive messages that may have arrived while their radio was powered down The bridging software provides a pending message delivery service allowing frames to b
20. bridge priority in a similar election procedure to determine which access point serves as designated bridge for that subnet Once a designated bridge is elected it attaches to the super root indicating that it is the designated bridge for the subnet Designated bridges are responsible for forwarding hellos to other access points on the local subnets These hellos indicate to other access points that they are the designated bridge for that subnet Redundancy The super root and designated bridge election procedure are repeated if the current super root or designated bridge stops sending hellos This provides redundancy in the event of an isolated access point router power or cabling failure Normally one primary and one or two fallback super root candidates are sufficient for super root redundancy One primary designated bridge and one fallback are recommend for most remote subnet installations The number of remote subnets and redundancy needs on each subnet influences the selection of address types in the IP Addresses menu See the configuration examples on page E 13 E 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P Frame Forwarding MAC frames originating on the home subnet are encapsulated in the super root forwarded through the IP network deencapsulated in the designated bridge and forwarded to the appropriate access point for delivery to the intended wireless station The same process is used in reverse betwe
21. supply is an autosensing international power supply t accepts a source voltage between 85 and 264 V ac with a frequency between 47 and 63 Hz 5 l1OBASE 2 The 10 BASE 2 port is a standard BNC port through which the access point connects to 10BASE2 Ethernet thinnet 6 10BASE T The 10 BASE T port is a standard RJ 45 port through which the access point connects to LOBASE T UTP Ethernet 7 AUI TheAUI port is a 15 pin D subminiature D sub port The access point connects to an AUI network adaptor through this port for connection to 1OBASE5 Ethernet thicknet Appendix F Port and Cable Pin Outs contains pin definitions NOTE Section 3 Installation shows how to connect the access point to 10BASE2 10BASE5 and 10BASE T 8 DIAG TheDIAG port is a 9 pin D sub communication port that communicates at RS 232 levels Usethis port to configure the access point download new software and retrieve statistics Appendix F contains pin definitions 2 18 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Accessories Power Cord The power cord connects the access point to the wall outlet The following chart lists power cord part numbers Country Part Number Australia 321 472 001 Denmark 321 501 001 Europe 321 473 001 Italy 321 471 001 Germany 321 515 001 United Kingdom 321 474 001 United States 321 054 001 Industrial Locking Mounting Bracket The Industrial Locking Mounting Brack
22. to obtain IP addresses from a DHCP server on the network Settings are Enabl ed Enabled if IP address is zero Disabled 6710 Access Point User s Guide 4 19 SECTION 4 Configuration Setting Description Enabled DHCP always obtains IP addresses for the access point subnet mask and optional default router when the access point reboots It also obtains the lease expiration time Enabled iflIP IfIP Address is 0 0 0 0 DHCP obtains IP address is zero addresses for the access point subnet mask default and optional default router It also obtains thelease expiration time The access point ignores other DHCP configuration options Disabled Disables DHCP You must manually set the IP addresses before the TCP IP stack is enabled NOTE If you are using OWL IP tunneling you should not use DHCP to allocate IP addresses to super root candidates or designated bridges unless a permanent lease is used and the access point is rebooted after getting an address OWL IP options start on page 4 79 The access point responds only to address offers from DHCP or Bootp servers In either case the server is specified in the DHCP server name field DHCP Server Name The prompt for the DHCP server name is Range is 31 chars The access point responds only to the named server The default server name is Norand DHCP Server This name prevents the access point from inadvertently obtaining an P configuration from existing
23. wireless stations In this environment stations can only operate within the limited coverage area of its own network and cannot roam across subnet boundaries OWL IP provides the capability of installing a single extended wireless system in the routed environment OWL IP provides Extension of the open wireless LAN spanning tree to include access points operating on different IP networks or subnetworks Transparent roaming of wireless stations across router boundaries without loss of connectivity Support of wireless stations using both IP and ordinarily nonroutable protocols 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 1 APPENDIXE OWL P OWL IP is activated by enabling the OWL IP port in the access point The port is an entryway to an IP tunnd originated by the super root on the home subn and terminated by a designated bridge operating on a remote subn amp Frames are encapsulated using the GRE protocol running over IP The super root can originate IP tunnels to eight or fewer IP addresses The number of tunnels supported may be more than or fewer than eight depending on the type of addressing used and redundancy needs within the installation The OWL IP port differs from the physical NIC1 NIC2 and Ethernet ports within the access point It is a logical port that provides I P encapsulation services for frames that must be routed to reach their destination Once encapsulated frames are transmitted or received through one of th
24. 0 ccc cece ete eee ene F 1 AUI Port Pin Outs 0 cece cece nh F 2 DIAG Port Cable ce erc Iu eee exse F 3 APPENDIX G MIB raana oh eared tn eR vx X RTT ETES G 1 Product Contents cc cece c eee teen eese G 1 About This Product ccc cc cece eee ee G 1 Getting Started ces eene Reeds G 2 MIB I Information 0 0 c cece cence eens G 2 6710 Access Point MIB Information G 3 Access to Management Information G 4 MBB AL NOLGS 5 oce eoe ret et dongs e cce ie dA adea G 6 MIB DIFectory 5 esd oh hod wie pL Id aed aids Gea G 6 6710 Access Point User s Guide xi CONTENTS MIB OUUING 44 c443 geri udd dedi gds RAN RR p prd G 8 ProductOl DS x enesuerts PRU re IRR G 8 System Information ssssssssessessse G 9 Interface Information sssssssssseessseee G 12 SNMP Version 1 Configuration Group G 17 Bridging Parameters 00 cece eee eee eee G 18 Control Groups 000 cece eee G 22 MIB Definitions 0 G 23 GLOSSARY cccccceee ness Glossary 1 INDEX sionis acia a ho a V ROER n OR DO a a Index 1 FIGURES Figure 2 1 6710 Access Points ssssseses 2 1 Figure 2 2 6710 Access Point Functions 2 2 Figure 2 3 Sample Network Configuration 2 15 Figure 2 4 Access Point Components 2 16 Figure 2 5 PC Card Slots sssseees 2 17 F
25. 061868 586610 589377 064432 061475 063146 B 6 6710 Access Point User s Guide 6710 adapter cable to cable page B 5 Cable 2 5 feet 76 cm Cable 5 feet 152 cm Cable 20 feet 610 cm Splitter Lightning suppressor and bracket Lightning suppressor capsule LMR4A00 cable prep tool LMR400 cable 100 feet Type N polarized cable connector Type N cable connector Appendix C 900 MHz Specifications and Antennas RM160 The model name for the 900 MHz radio is RM 160 a Type III PC card Following are networking specifications Frequency band Range Coverage Data rate Channelization Software compatibility Output power MAC protocol Optional interbuilding wireless bridge Operating temperature Regulatory compliance 902 to 928 MHz spread spectrum direct sequence Up to 1300 feet line of sight 100 000 350 000 square feet in typical indoor installations 90 225 or 450 Kbps depends on installation 7 90 Kbps 1 225 or 450 K bps Requires communications driver included with the 6710 Access Point software 250 mW Open wireless LAN MAC radio proto col Yes 49F to 122 4F 20 4C to 50 4C FCC 15 247 Industry Canada RSS 210 Consult a Sales Reoresentati ve for availability 6710 Access Point User s Guide C 1 APPENDIXC 900 MHz Specifications and Antennas Radio Operation Wireless devices with the 900 MHz option can operate in Australia and in most countries in
26. 2 Collinear dipole antennas B 4 Command monitor 4 5 5 22 Commands 4 14 B 5 23 Clear 4 13 Define File Segment 5 25 5 26 Erase PCMCIA Card 5 25 5 27 Erase Segment 5 25 Exit 4 14 5 25 FB s 5 25 5 26 FC s 5 23 FD 5 23 5 25 Fd 5 6 FE 5 25 Fe 5 8 FFR f 5 25 5 26 FI 5 25 5 26 File 4 13 File System Directory 5 23 5 25 File System Reset 5 25 5 26 Commands Continued FPC f s 5 25 5 26 FPD 5 25 5 26 FPE 5 25 5 27 FPX 5 25 5 27 FR 5 23 5 24 FS sn 5 25 5 26 FX s 5 23 MI String 5 25 5 28 Move File to FLASH 5 23 Norand Password Menu 5 23 NPWD 5 23 5 24 Password Menu 5 23 PCMCIA File Directory 5 25 5 26 PCMCIA File to FLASH 5 25 5 26 PN 5 25 5 27 Power Up Normal 5 25 5 27 Power Up Quiet 5 25 5 27 PQ 5 25 5 27 PWD 5 23 5 25 Read 4 13 4 14 Reboot 4 14 5 16 5 23 Reset Modem Init String 5 25 5 28 RMI 5 25 5 28 Run File 5 25 5 26 Run FLASH Boot File 5 23 Serial Baud Rate 5 23 Set Boot Segment 5 25 5 26 Set Modem Init String 5 25 5 28 SR z 5 23 5 24 TFTP 5 8 View 4 13 4 14 Write 4 14 X 5 25 5 28 Y modem F ile Download 5 23 Y modem File to PCMCIA Components 10BASE T 3 3 10BASE2 3 3 10BASE5 3 4 access point 2 16 communication equipment 3 5 Ethernet LAN 3 2 Telnet 3 6 Web browser 3 6 Configuring the access point DIAG port 4 2 4 12 Telnet 4 6 4 12 Web browser 4 88 Connecting to
27. 2 1 5 ICMP process TCP 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 TCP process UDP 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 UDP process EGP 1 3 6 1 2 1 8 EGP process CMOT 1 3 6 1 2 1 9 Historical inclusion for OSI support Transmission 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 Allows for data based on I O port dot3 Ethernet type SNMP 1 3 6 1 2 1 11 Allows data to be collected about SNMP devices The6710 Access Point does not support EGP and CMOT 6710 Access Point MIB Information Intermec has structured its proprietary management information similar to MIB II In addition to MIB II the 6710 Access Point supports information specific to its operation 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 3 APPENDIXG MIB EXAMPLE Device system information is found undernSystem similar to MIB II System The OID for the nS ystem group ends in 1 just as the OID for MIB II system ends in 1 Table G 2 shows access point MIB information Table G 2 MIB Information MIB Family OID Purpose Groups nSystem 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 1 Model device hw file fsinfo type software segment dir file system sysErrors criticalErrors ninterfaces 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 2 O ports nifx portState portStats ptxq pmsg nSNMP 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 11 SNMP community trapTarget nBridge 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 17 Bridging rt brg addr brgState bridgeStats nControl 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 105 Device control powerU p softwareDownL oad Access to Management Information Access to Intermec m
28. 4 nuts bolts and washers Anchor the plywood base to two separate wall studs by four 2 X 1 4 diameter lag screws two lag screws in each stud Figure 3 6 Mounting Bracket 6710 Access Point User s Guide 3 9 SECTION3 Installation 1 Inspect where the access point will be mounted and determine what hardware is needed Different surfaces such as drywall wood and concrete block require different mounting hardware For this reason a universal mounting bracket is included with the access point 2 Remove the mounting plate from the bottom of the access point 3 Using the mounting plate as a template mark where the anchors that secure the mounting plate to the surface should be located 4 Attach the access point mounting plate to the wall or ceiling with 21 x 1 4 diameter lag screws or bolts depending upon the surface The mounting plate must be secured to the surface by at least four anchors one on each corner 5 Reattach the access point to the mounting plate 6 Makeall Ethernet connections See Connecting to Ethernet 7 Make all power connections See Applying Power on page 3 20 8 Watch the indicator lights to verify that the access point is working properly See Section 6 Indicator Lights for help NOTE An optional locking kit is available See Section 2 Features and Functional Overview for more information Connecting to Ethernet The following pages show how to conne
29. 4 77 4 78 station WLIF radio beacon frequency 4 70 channel 4 62 4 67 menu option 4 60 4 61 parameters 4 62 subchannel 4 62 4 67 wireless hops 4 65 Index 7 INDEX Master Parms 4 60 4 62 Media Access Control sublayer See MAC sublayer Medium gain collinear dipole antenna B 4 Medium gain patch antenna B 3 Medium priority 4 78 Memory A 1 MHRP E 5 MI String command 5 25 5 28 MIB G 1 MIB directory G 6 MIB families G 3 MIB groups bridging addr G 20 G 63 brg G 19 G 61 brgstate G 20 G 64 bridgeStats G 22 G 69 rt G 18 G 56 control powerU p G 23 G 72 softwareDownL oad G 23 G 72 interface information nifx G 12 G 32 pmsg G 16 G 49 portState G 13 G 36 portStats G 14 G 41 ptxq G 15 G 46 products G 8 G 24 SNMP community G 17 G 52 trapTarget G 17 G 55 system information criticalErrors G 11 G 30 dir G 11 G 28 fsinfo G 10 G 25 hw G 9 G 24 segment G 10 G 26 MIB outline G 8 MIB II G 2 G 3 G 6 Minutes between ARPs 4 22 Mnemonic 5 3 Mobile Host Routing Protocol E 5 Mobile IP E 5 E 12 Glossary 5 Mobility E 12 Mode 1 4 75 2 4 75 3 4 75 900 MHz radio 4 74 ARP server 4 23 4 36 OWL IP 4 82 S UHF radio 4 76 4 77 4 78 transmit 4 69 4 72 4 73 MODE light 6 2 Mode channel 4 74 Model 110 B 5 Model 2100 B 5 B 6 Modem cable 3 6 4 3 F 3 Modifying the configuration 4 13 4 14 Mounting 3 8 Move File to Flash comman
30. 5 UDP MIB family G 3 UHF 4 38 4 39 4 76 UHF Frag Size 4 25 4 26 4 27 UHF radio SeeS UHF radio UHF Rfp Threshold 4 25 4 26 4 27 Unicast ARP requests 4 36 definition Glossary 9 flooding and flood register 4 36 4 59 checklist 4 31 inbound 4 28 outbound to secondaries 4 29 outbound to stations 4 30 S UHF radio 4 36 OWL IP 4 83 4 84 permanent addresses 4 42 static addresses 4 42 Uniform Resource Locator 4 89 Unlisted 4 46 URL 4 89 User name 4 90 USTART29 BIN 5 1 5 6 5 7 5 9 UTP Ethernet See TOBASE T UTP Ethernet V Value 4 27 4 56 Value Id 4 53 4 55 4 56 Values 4 52 4 56 Vampire tap 3 4 Versions Ethernet 4 19 Glossary 3 FLASH 1 1 5 9 ROM 1 1 5 9 Vertical mount 3 9 View command 4 13 4 14 Viewing the configuration 4 14 Voltages A 1 W W LINK light 6 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide INDEX Web browser 3 6 4 88 Weight A 2 Whip antennas B 3 C 2 D 3 Width A 2 Wired access points Glossary 1 Wired bridges Glossary 1 Wireless access points 4 61 Glossary 1 Wireless hops definition Glossary 4 Glossa ry 9 example 2 15 S UHF radio D 3 WLIF radio 4 62 4 65 Wireless PC cards 900 MHz specifications C 1 installing 3 17 S UHF specifications D 1 slots 2 17 WLIF specifications B 1 Wireless stations 900 MHz radio options 4 75 ARP server mode 4 36 attaching to Master 4 61 4 67 4 70 attaching to Slave 4 65 beacon freque
31. 6 7 8 E 22 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P Comments The All Subnets broadcast generates traffic to all subnets induding those that do not contain access points Some IP routers do not support All Subnets or may require specific configuration There are practical limits on the number of tunnels a super root can establish and support These limits depend on factors unique to each installation such as network traffic The eight tunnel addresses specified in the menu are a conservative limit for large networks Generally installations that require roaming over multiple subnets can be partitioned in other ways Consult your Sales Representative or Technical Support for more information Step 4 TX filter set up is identical to Example 1 page E 13 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 23 APPENDIXE OWL P E 24 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Appendix F Port and Cable Pin Outs This appendix lists pin outs for the 6710 Access Point s DIAG and AUI ports and the standard null modem cable DIAG Port Pin Outs The following chart defines the signals present on the pins for the DIAG port Pin numbering is from left to right and top to bottom For example pin 1 is on the top left of the connector and the last pin is on the bottom right Pin Number Signal Name Not used TXD RXD DTR GND DSR Not used Not used Not used O ON AU UN H Signal Level RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 RS 2
32. Bridge Security The following chart describes how to use the options 4 14 6710 Access Point User s Guide Use Tcpip Page 4 16 Bridge Page 4 23 Security Page 4 86 SECTION4 Configuration To Set options necessary for communications with this access point The options apply to all TCP IP ports Telnet SNMP and HTTP communications are supported Control the bridging of messages among the radio and Ethernet ports for this access point Settings to control interaction with other access points are also under the Bridge option Set the configuration program s top level password and other security passwords The screens in this section show the options default settings Some settings such as the serial number are unique to each access point Other settings such as certain radio configurations are automatically set and you cannot change them This section identifies the settings you cannot change as read onl y The following chart shows how to navigate the View command s menus and edit data Press To t or Scroll up through items in a list 1 EH or Tab Scroll down through items in a list gt Enter or Spacebar Display an option s settings or prompt after you highlight the option Also use these keys to select the desired setting lt Esc or Backspace Exit a menu or prompt Esc Enter Cancel editing Complete editing 6710 Access PointUse
33. Browser Session sussss Configuration Guidelines 0 cece eee Planning Your Installation sss Using the Configuration Guide Luuuss SECTION 5 Software Download enn nnn nnn File System Structure 0 cece eee eee eee Boot Segments Land 2 0 cece eee eee Data Segments 3 and 4 0 0 c cece Active and Inactive Segments 00005 RAM Segment ussseesses eee Segment Names ssssessses seen nnn File Natres o scere eee re rrt Reb nie ota Seen aah othe Downloading Programs sssseeeeseese File Menu Commands sssssssseseeeseese Eb Cormtunand soam en pure FO Command i aena epe pex EE Fdel Command ses dirs na a oa ae E a a 6710 Access Point User s Guide CONTENTS Fecommarnd 2o cric erpi aig i webag e pee dane eee 5 8 TETP Command 22i pecans wad Saha E A aad 5 8 TETP SOP VEO SI eise Re rc enh ae Bue 5 9 Server Start so diarie dene ethos on te Ape Reid 5 10 Server SLOD si saper eR ah anaconda a 5 10 Server Log 2 ccc eee eee 5 10 TFTP Client Commands ssesesees 5 10 ic ELEC 5 11 uU MM 5 12 Script Command scisco Rp n Red 5 12 Creating Script Files ccc cece eee eee 5 13 Sample Script File 2 0 cece eee eee eee eee 5 14 Script File Command Summary 055 5 15 TFTP Client Command Retry
34. D D n n ou OO N r3 e irSize 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The file size in bytes dirEntry 5 e irDate 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 12 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The file date in MM DD YYYY display format dirEntry 6 dirTi me OBJ ECT TYPE YNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 10 CCESS read only TATUS mandatory ESCRI PTI ON The file time in HH MM SS display format dirEntry 7 CJ Co m cnc e irVersion OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 8 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The file version in v99 99 display format dirEntry 8 sysErrors OBJECT IDENTIFIER nSystem 4 criticalErrors OBJECT IDENTIFIER sysErrors 1 G 30 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB ceEnabl ed 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON A value of true 1 signifies that the critical error log was successfully initialized as part of the power up sequence Any errors in that initialization process result in a value of false 2 ei criticalErrors 1 ceOverflow 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Overflow error code If the overflow code is non zero it indicates that the log has overflowed and the overflow code contains the last displac
35. D 3 wireless hops D 3 Safety A 1 Save this password in your pass word list 4 90 Saving the configuration 4 14 Scope 4 45 4 46 Script command 5 12 Script files 5 13 SCRIPT DAT 5 13 SCRIPT TXT 5 13 ScriptF ilename variable 5 18 SDVars command 5 17 Secondary LANs See also Designated bridges bridge priority 4 57 definition Glossary 8 filtering example 4 48 flooding to 4 29 4 32 4 43 network organization 2 4 Slave station 4 61 4 67 wireless hops to 4 65 4 66 Security 4 14 4 86 Security 4 60 4 86 E 7 Security Id 4 60 Segment Glossary 8 Separation guidelines D 10 Serial Baud Rate command 5 23 5 24 Serial number 4 23 Server command 5 9 Server name field 4 20 Server start command 5 10 Server stop command 5 10 Serverl PAddress variable 5 18 6710 Access Point User s Guide INDEX Servers Bootp 2 12 4 20 dass identifier string 4 21 DHCP 2 12 4 19 4 20 DHCP server name 4 21 filtering levels 4 33 flooding frames inbound 4 29 on home subnet 4 80 OWL IP tunnels 4 80 Proxy ARP 2 7 server name 4 20 TFTP 2 13 5 8 5 9 Service password 4 86 Sessions DIAG port 3 5 4 2 Telnet 3 6 4 6 Web browser 3 6 4 88 Set Boot Segment command 5 25 5 26 Set globally 4 27 Set Modem Init String com mand 5 25 5 28 SetActivePointers variable 5 21 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 6 G 1 Single frequency D 7 D 8 Site license D 4 Sit
36. DIX IP Protocol 4 47 DIX IP TCP Ports Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 DIX IP TCP Port 4 47 DIX IP UDP Ports Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 DIX IP UDP Port 4 47 DIX IPX Sockets Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 DIX IPX Socket 4 47 DIX Other EtherTypes Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 Domain 4 23 Driver name 4 38 4 39 Drop 4 45 4 55 Drop cable 3 4 DS 4 75 C 1 Glossary 3 Dual flat antenna B 6 Dual radio options 2 9 4 65 Echo Reply E 6 Echo Request E 6 EEPROM 4 14 EGP E 5 EGP MIB family G 3 Electrical specifications A 1 Electronic software distribution 2 13 Index 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide Emissions A 2 Enabled DHCP 4 19 4 20 Enabled if IP address is zero 4 19 4 20 Enabling ARP server mode 4 36 designated bridge 4 58 DHCP 4 19 4 20 Ethernet port 4 40 flood register 4 59 4 60 flooding 4 29 4 30 global parameters 4 27 Master mode 4 77 4 78 radio port 4 40 Enter Network Password Screen 4 89 Environmental specifications A 2 EQ operator 4 54 Erase PC Card command 5 25 5 27 Erase Segment command 5 25 Ethernet 4 38 4 39 4 41 Ethernet broadcast address 4 84 cable type 4 41 4 42 connecting to 2 18 3 10 definition Glossary 3 filters 2 8 4 43 frame type 4 41 LAN com
37. E Describes OWL IP IP tunneling Appendix F Shows port and cable pin outs Appendix G Describes the 6710 Management Information Base MIB The glossary at the end of this manual lists network terms 1 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION1 Preface Intended Audience This user s guide is intended for these audiences Network administrator who is familiar with various types and configurations of computer networks how they work and the terminology used when discussing them Hardware installer who is responsible for performing the physical installation of the access point and any related hardware that might be required Related Publications The following publications are available They include information about hardware and software products related to or used with the access point and the network on which it operates Numbers in parentheses after the title indicate the publication s part number Contact your Sales Representative for ordering information Wireless Station User s Guides Wireless station user s guides describe how to set up operate and maintain radio terminals in each series of terminal Specific manuals are PEN KEY Model 6400 User s Guide 961 047 093 PEN KEY Mode 6500 6550 User s Guide 961 047 099 RT1100 Radio Terminal User s Guide 961 047 069 RT1700 Radio Terminal User s Guide 961 047 068 RT5900 Radio Terminal User s Guide 961 047 121 6710 Access Point Us
38. NNL Station a 192 168 15 227 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Station 192 168 15 228 Figure E 3 Example Class C Configuration E 14 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Ste Ste APPENDIXE OWL P pi Access points are assigned P addresses for the appropriate subnets Subnet 192 168 15 0 is designated as the home subnet since it contains the servers used by wireless stations Wireless stations that require IP connectivity are given IP addresses on this subnet Access point AP 1 is selected as the primary super root and assigned root priority 3 AP 2 is selected as the fallback super root and assigned root priority 1 All other access points are configured to root priority 0 p2 AP 4 is selected as the designated bridge for subnet 192 168 17 0 and configured with bridge priority 2 AP 3 is configured as the fallback designated bridge for that subnet and configured with bridge priority 1 Other access points on the subnet are configured with bridge priority O AP 5 is chosen as the designated bridge for subnet 192 168 23 21 Step 3 The two super root candidates are configured to originate tunnels Two options are available unicast addressing and directed broadcast 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 15 APPENDIX E OWL IP Option A Unicast Addressing In this example unicast IP addresses are entered in the table for each designated bridge The two designated bridges on subnet 192 168 17 0 negotiate which ac
39. North and South America Contact a Sales Representative for current information about countries in which the product is approved for use and countries in which submission for type approval is planned Part Numbers The following chart lists RM160 part numbers and special comments RM160 Part Number Compatibility and Comments 226 120 001 Kit cable only used with 219 010 001 219 010 001 RM160 only Used with 226 120 001 for PC card slot 1 or 2 Antenna Regulations For 900 MHz systems regulations require the antenna and antenna connector on the access point to be unique and not commercially available This ensures that the RF output of the radio stays within the limits specified by the regulating agencies Whip Antenna The standard WLIF whip antenna can be used throughout Europe Its part number is 805 472 001 C 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXC 900 MHz Specifications and Antennas Remote Antenna Kits Remote antenna kits allow a variety of antenna configurations for a radio installed in the access point to be located up to 30 feet from the access point Contact your Sales Representative for information about the antenna kit most suitable for your installation NOTE FCC and DOC regulations require that qualified personnel install remote antennas Contact your Sales Representative for more information The following chart lists 900 MHz radio antenna kits Antenna Kit Part Number 3 dB
40. PhysAddress psType NTEGER psState NTEGER psCost NTEGER psHelloPeriod NTEGER psHelloCount Counter psMacdWi ndow NTEGER psMacdQSize Gauge psMacdTi meouts Counter psilsPri mary NTEGER pslsSecondary NTEGER pslsSecondaryCandi date NTEGER psSecondaryUni Flooding NTEGER psSecondaryMultiFlooding INTEGER psi sRadio NTEGER psPendEnabl ed NTEGER psPort OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R port ID 1 4 A number which uniquely identifies the port psEntry 1 psi fl ndex OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC D interface index The index matches the interface index of the associated row in the mib l interface table psEntry 2 psAddress 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 802 address of the port psEntry 3 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 37 APPENDIXG M B psType 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ether 4 bb485 33 owl P 66 proxi m24 132 nor24 195 fal con902 197 uhf 198 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Norand port type ether 4 Proxim 196 Falcon 197 UHF 198 psEntry 4 psState OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER disabl ed 0 idle 1 open 2 recei ve 3 transmit 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Port state disabled idle open re
41. Redundancy Redundancy is the ability of a duplicate access point to immediately take over the function of another access point that goes offline Remote Subnet The remote subn amp is an Ethernet segment other than the distribution LAN For Enterprise OWL the remote subnet is the Ethernet link of the access point that attaches to the super root through an IP tunnel 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Glossary 7 GLOSSARY ROM Read Only Memory Root Subnet ROM contains computer instructions that cannot be repro grammed by the user The computer can read instructions out of ROM but no data can be stored in ROM The user can change some of the variables within ROM such as the software boot segment data segment and baud rate The root subnet is the Ethernet segment to which the access point super root connects which is the distribution LAN For Enterprise OWL the root subnet is the Ethernet link of the access point that originates an IP tunnel which is the super root Secondary Ethernet LAN Segment A secondary Etherne LAN is an Ethernet segment that con nects to the distribution LAN through a wireless link A single access point functions as the designated bridge for the secondary LAN In LANs a segment is a length of cable from termination to termination For example a 1OBASE2 cable segment is the length of cable between the 50 Ohm terminators that attach to each end of the cable For proper network commu nicati
42. SECTION6 Indicator Lights Power Up Sequence When you power on the access point it performs a power up sequence that does the following Tests the indicator lights Tests the functional circuits Determines the operational status Determines the boot sequence You can monitor the power up sequence through the indicator lights During power up the lights operate in this order 1 LINK indicator light turns ON and stays ON 2 STATUS MODE R LINK W LINK NICI and NIC2 lights blink three times to indicate they are operational 3 After the previous lights stop blinking W LINK light blinks three more times 4 About eight seconds after W LINK stops blinking R WINK W LINK NIC1 and NIC2 lights either turn ON or stay OFF to indicate the DI AG port s baud rate see page 6 6 5 MODE light blinks constantly to indicate it is in network mode the normal operating condition After the access point completes its boot sequence it enters its normal operating mode During normal operation the STATUS indicator light is OFF 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 6 7 SECTION6 Indicator Lights 6 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide Appendix A Access Point Specifications Product Specifications Processor AMD 29200 RISC Memory 4MB RAM 2 MB FLASH ROM Distribution LAN ANSI IEEE 802 3 Ethernet communication compatibility standard and DI X Version 2 0 nterface 10BASE2 thinnet TOBASE5 AUI or thicknet and 10
43. SYNTAX NIFXEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX nifxlndex nifxTable 1 G 32 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB NIFXEntry SEQUENCE nif xl ndex NTEGER nifxType NTEGER nifxlnDisabledDiscards Counter nifxl nOverruns Counter nifxl nHWOverruns Counter nifxlnUcast DPkts Counter nifxlnNUcastDPkts Counter nifxl nLenErrors Counter nifxExcessi veDeferrals Counter nifxl nNetl DDi scar ds Counter nifxl nFragDiscards Counter nifxl nUFilterDiscards Counter nifxl nNUFilterDiscards Counter nifxl nQFullDiscards Counter nif xl ndex OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Interface index nifxEntry 1 ni fxType 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ether 4 bb485 33 owl P 66 proxi m24 132 nor24 195 falcon902 197 uhf 198 D 1 D 1 1 D ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Norand Interface Type nifxEntry 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 33 APPENDIXG M B nifxlnDisabledDiscards OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of received unicast frames which do not require forwarding Unicast ethernet frames are discarded if ether to radio flooding is disabled and the destination is unknown otherwise unicast frames are discarded if the bridge has learned that the destination port is the same as the source port nif
44. TFTP dient commands GET and PUT until the command completes successfully If the first attempt to transfer the file fails the access point retries after a one minute delay With each successive failure the retry time doubles until it reaches 8 minutes Oncethis limit is reached it remains at 8 minutes until the command completes Reboot Command The Reboot command located on the Main Menu forces the access point to restart immediately If it is issued within a script file commands following it are not executed If used Reboot should always be the last command in the file Because Reboot causes an immediate reboot before the script file processing is completed the software download status is not updated to accurately reflect the result of the software download Whilethis has no adverse effect on access point operation you can not tell whether the download completed successfully without examining the version numbers of the active boot and data files after the access point has rebooted The preferred method of rebooting after a script file has completed is to set the next power up time variable This should be the last thing the script file does to allow the script file processing to complete and the software download status variable to be updated before the reboot occurs 5 16 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION5 Software Download SDVars C Argument Serverl pAddress ScriptFilename StartTi me Status CheckPoi nt
45. access points may be on different IP subnets OWL IP is designed to support rapid roaming in these environments A roam requires updates to the forwarding databases in the new access point super root previous access point and any intermediate designated bridges A roam is initiated when a station attaches to a new access point This access point sends an attach message to the super root which in turn forwards a detach message to the previous access point allowing each access point to update its forwarding database Designated bridges monitor these exchanges and update their forwarding databases Mobile IP Comparison The Internet Engineering Task Force has developed RFC 2002 IP Mobility Support commonly referred to as Mobile IP Mobile IP is designed primarily to address the needs of P stations that may move between geographically separated locations OWL IP is designed primarily to operate in local area environments where handcarried or vehicle mounted stations may move rapidly between access point coverage areas on a subnetted LAN Thetwo technologies are complimentary and may coexist Table E 1 summarizes some differences E 12 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Comparison Software compatibility Addressing limitations for IP stations Routing of non IP protocols Scalability Special network soft ware Table E 1 Mobile IP Comparison Mobile IP Requires a Mobile IP client software stack in IP wirel
46. and Appendix E OWL I P Configuration and Management Configuration The access point can be configured through a local RS 232 connection or remotely through a TCP IP connection The access point indudes a command monitor and menu driven configuration with online help The command monitor and file system configuration are contained in permanent read only memory ROM within the access point and can be accessed through the RS 232 diagnostics port even if software is not loaded in the access point Most access point functionality is provided by the software stored within the file system Configuration parameters are stored in nonvolatile EEPROM memory and are maintained in the event of power loss Diagnostics and Configuration Port An RS 232 configuration port is provided for direct access to the access point s command monitor and configuration menus Access through the diagnostics port is password protected for security 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 2 11 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview The port uses a standard PC AT style cable and operates at speeds up to 57 6 Kbps Configuration using this port is described in Section 4 Configuration Remote Access Remote access is available over TCP IP connections using Telnet or Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP for configuration management and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP for network management TCP IP The access point supports remote ac
47. f0 fo 1 lt Pass gt lt DIX IP Protocol gt 01 2 Pass DI X I P TCP Port 14 3 Pass DIX IP TCP Port 15 4 Pass DI X I P TCP Port 17 Drop P TCP Port E 18 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P Example 2 Class B IP Address Using Subnetting The example in Figure E 4 uses the Class B address of 172 16 0 0 and a subnet mask of 255 255 248 0 This provides 30 subnets of 2046 hosts each Subnet addressing for this network is described under IP Subnet Mask in Section 4 Configuration In this example each subnet has about 10 access points The home subnet contains the address range of 172 16 16 1 through 172 16 23 254 Step 1 Access points are assigned IP addresses for the appropriate subnets Subnet 172 16 16 0 is designated as the home subnet since it contains the servers used by wireless stations Wireless stations that require IP connectivity are given IP addresses on this subnet AP 1 is selected as the primary super root and given root priority 3 AP 2 is selected as the fallback super root and assigned root priority 1 All other access points are configured to root priority 0 Step 2 AP 11 is selected as the designated bridge for subnet 192 16 24 0 and configured with bridge priority 2 AP 12 is configured as the fallback designated bridge for that subnet and configured with bridge priority 1 Other access points on the subnet are configured with bridge p
48. functions as a bridge with up to four ports An Ethernet port One or two radio ports An Open Wireless LAN I nternet Protocol OWL IP port The access point is a translating bridge because it forwards frames between Ethernet and wireless media that have unique physical and MAC protocol implementations The access point implements the basic learning and forwarding functions of a simple wired LAN bridge It also includes additional functionality to address unique problems in wireless LANs Significant functions supported at the bridging layer indude network organization support for roaming and power managed stations and programmable flooding levels Network Organization Open wireless LAN networks may be complex supporting Small or large numbers of access points on a single wired LAN backbone Stations that roam between coverage areas and employ power management to improve battery life More complex topologies include the following Range extension through wireless access points which are not connected to the wired LAN backbone Secondary LANs connection of wired LAN segments by wireless links Mixed radio frequency RF media Operation over multiple IP subnets Multiple independent wireless LANs on one wired LAN backbone 2 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Access points automatically configure into a self organized network using a spanning tree topology They
49. gain 10 ft cable 203 325 001 3 dB gain 20 ft cable 203 325 002 3 dB gain 30 ft cable 203 325 003 Low profile ceiling mount 203 367 001 20 ft cable 6710 Access PointUser s Guide C 3 APPENDIXC 900 MHz Specifications and Antennas C 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide Appendix D S UHF Specifications and Antennas RM111 The model name for the S UHF radio option is RM111 a Typell PC card Following are networking specifications Frequency band Range Coverage Data rate Channelization Transmit power Receiver sensitivity Output power MAC protocol Wireless hop capability Optional interbuilding wireless bridge Operatingtemperature 430 to 450 MHz or 450 to 470 MHz Up to 3500 feet line of sight 800 000 square feet 72 000 square meters in typical indoor installations 19 2 K bps 14 4 K bps with forward error correction four level frequency shift keying 20 kHz or 25 kHz 27 dBm 5 Watts 105 dBm 500 mW Open wireless LAN MAC radio protocol No see page D 3 No 49F to 122 fF 209C to 50 4C 6710 Access Point User s Guide D 1 APPENDIXD S UHF Specifications and Antennas Regulatory compliance FCC Part 90 pending ETS 300 220 CE 300 339 Europe MPT 1329 FTZ 2014 Consult a local sales officefor the cur rent regulatory status Radio Operation Wireless devices with the S UHF option can operate in selected countries in Europe Asia except J apan Austral
50. gain yagi antenna B 5 medium gain collinear dipole antenna B 4 medium gain patch antenna B 3 Model 2100 antennas and cables B 6 Model 2100 cables and con nectors B 6 publications 1 3 remote antenna kits B 3 C 3 S UHF radio D 2 T connector 3 3 whip antennas B 3 D 3 WLIF radio B 2 Pass 4 45 4 55 Password M enu command 5 23 5 25 Password screen 4 12 Passwords advanced 4 86 4 87 changing 4 86 configuration menus 4 12 4 86 Enter Network Password screen 4 90 ROM command monitor menu 5 25 security 4 86 service 4 86 top level 4 12 4 86 6710 Access Point User s Guide INDEX Patch antennas B 3 PC card slots 2 17 PC cards 900 MHz radio 3 18 C 1 S UHF radio 3 19 D 1 WLIF radio 3 17 B 1 PCMCIA File Directory com mand 5 25 5 26 PCMCIA FiletoFlash com mand 5 25 5 26 PCMCIA light group 6 2 Peer station 4 77 Pending messages 2 5 Permanent addresses 4 35 4 42 Permanent filters 4 85 E 4 Permanent leases 4 20 4 81 Physical addresses See MAC addresses Physical characteristics A 2 Pin outs F 1 F 2 F 3 PN command 4 5 5 25 5 27 POLARITY indicator light 6 2 Ports 4 23 4 38 Ports bridge 2 2 2 3 Ethernet 2 7 4 38 4 41 OWL I P 2 10 4 79 radio 2 9 4 38 Power applying 3 20 cord 2 19 3 20 management 2 5 output B 1 C 1 D 1 requirements A 1 Power U p Normal command 4 5 5 25 5 27 Power U p Quiet command 4 5 5 25 5 2
51. globally distributed system parameters particularly flooding levels must be appropriate for all of the installed radio options 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 87 SECTION 4 Configuration Different LAN IDs Using separate LAN IDs for each radio option configures all access points with different radios into a distinct network regardless of radio type It may be more appropriate if the installation topology or applications supported do not fit the alternative that uses the same LAN ID OWLView shows two distinct LANs for this type of installation Creating a Web Browser Session NOTE NOTE The access point s configuration menus are designed for HTML Level 2 0 or higher Before you can configure the access point through a Web browser you must connect the unit to the Ethernet cable See Section 3 Installation for help You must also perform initial configuration through the DI AG port to Set an IP address or DHCP server name You should also configure a subnet mask and IP router address Set the Ethernet cable type The access point includes an autodetect feature that senses the Ethernet medium if traffic is present If no traffic is present on the cable the system software defaults to LOBASE T For most installations it is recommended that you explicitly set the Ethernet type The access point must go through its boot sequence before you can configure it through the browser If you reboot it wh
52. in the access point s boot segment and tries to run the file NPWD NPWD is for internal use by service personnel only SRz Serial baud rate command SR z sets the baud rate of the access point The format is ap sr baud rate Baud rates are 2400 4800 9600 default 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 Type the desired baud rate as a whole number no decimal equivalent with no commas For example to enter a baud rate of 19 200 type 19200 not 19 2 or 19 200 5 24 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION5 Software Download PWD PWD opens a password protected menu that contains file management commands Some of the commands delete files Others redefine the access point s file structure In either case the commands can cause undesirable results if not properly executed If in doubt on the proper procedure to use contact Technical Support for assistance To open the password menu type the following ap pwd The following displays Enter password The password is CR52401OWL must be in uppercase Following is the password menu FD File System Directory FPD PCMCIA File Directory FE s all Erase Segment s FPE Erase PCMCIA Card FI File System Reset FPX Ymodem File to PCMCIA FS sn Define File Segment PQ Power Up Quiet FB s Set Boot Segment PN Power Up Normal FFR f Run File MI string Set Modem Init String FPC f s PCMCIA File to Flash RMI Reset Modem Init String X
53. is Range is 1 1540 The default is 310 If two ACK errors occur in a row during the transmission of a large data frame it splits into two or more fragments and each fragment transmits separately An ACK error occurs if a acknowledgment frame is not received from the destination node 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 71 SECTION 4 Configuration Smaller fragments may allow successful operation in an environment with a high level of interference at the expense of throughput Transmit Mode Transmit M ode modulates the transmit signal and sets the bits per second Settings are BFSK QFSK AUTO Setting Description BFSK Binary Frequency Shift Keying Transmits at 0 8 M bps per second Data is transmitted by shifting between two frequencies to represent one bit of 0 or 1 BFSK has extended range over QF SK at the expense of throughput QFSK Quadrature F requency Shift Keying Transmits at 1 6 Mbps per second Data is transmitted by shift ing among four frequencies to represent two bits of Oor 1 QFSK has better throughput over BFSK at the expense of range AUTO Automatically adapts the bit rate to the error default conditions Thetransmit mode is automatically selected for the best range and throughput Norm Ack Retry Norm Ack Retry is the number of times any unfragmented frame QF SK or BFSK is resent unsuccessfully before fragmenting The prompt is Range is 1 255 4 72 6710 Access Point User s Guide SEC
54. mode you must send three or more consecutive exclamation points tothe DIAG port during the boot sequence to invoke the command monitor prompt ap gt Because the access point is in quiet mode no prompts appear to show you when to type the exclamation points The easiest way to do this is to apply power to the access point wait until the WLINK indicator light stops flashing for about 1 second and then type three or more exclamation points MI String MI String allows a custom modem initialization string to be used in the access point When a custom modem initialization string is entered it overrides the default string issued by the ROM on powerup During powerup the ROM checks the EEPROM for a valid modem initialization string custom initialization strings must start with the letters AT or at If the ROM finds a valid string in the EEPROM it uses this string instead of the default string in the ROM To remove a custom modem initialization string issue the RMI command RMI RMI removes a custom modem initialization string from the access point EEPROM see MI String The next time the access point is powered on the default modem initialization string located in ROM is loaded X Command X exits the password submenu and returns to the Main Menu 5 28 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION5 Software Download Exiting the ROM Command Monitor Exit the command monitor by running the Reboot command B or
55. n ab Script Command You can initiate an automatic software download through SNMP by setting the appropriate server IP address and script file name and then setting the software download time Thefollowing two commands execute automatically as if you had typed them on the command line File gt tftp get remote script file name gt ram sysswdl File gt script ram sysswdl 5 12 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION5 Software Download The first command establishes a TFTP session with the server gets the script file from the server and places the file in the RAM file segment giving it the name sysswdl The second command runs the script from the RAM segment The script file should contain the same commands you would use from the command line to erase the appropriate file segments download the new file s and reboot using the new software Totest the script file manually to ensure it functions log onto an access point and type the script file commands from the command line Creating Script Files Script files are ASCII text files with a 32 byte file system header appended The total file size including the 32 byte header must be less than the 4096 bytes in order to fit into the RAM file segment Each script file line must be fewer than 80 characters and be terminated by a line feed or a carriage return Only one command is permitted per line Spaces on a line are insignificant commands and arguments may be preced
56. only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 16 bit 0 65535 ATTACH sequence number This number is incremented each time the AP sends an ATTACH request brgState 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 65 APPENDIXG MIB bsMyRoot Priority OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 7 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Root priority of the AP 0 7 An AP with a root priority of 0 can not become the root node The AP with the highest priority will become the root in an OWL LAN brgState 9 bsRoot Port OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R root port number The port number 1 4 of the port used to communicate with the parent node brgState 10 bsDesignatedRootAddress OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 802 address of the current root brgState 11 bsDesignatedRootPriority OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 1 7 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Root priority of the current root 1 7 brgState 12 bsDesignatedRootSequence OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Root sequence of the current root 0 255 The sequence number identifies a single instance of the root brgState 13 G 66 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB bsParentAddress 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STAT
57. open wireless LAN The access point maintains the following management objects which are specific to its operation 6710MI B MIB contains all of the ntermec management objects supported on the 6710 Access Point RFC1213 MIB is the standard MIB II RFC1398 MIB isthe standard Ethernet MIB 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 1 APPENDIXG M B These MIBs are on the 6710 Access Point s MIB disk You need to load the MIBs onto your management platform to query the access point for these management objects Getting Started Install the MIBs onto your management platform in this order 1 RFC1213 MIB 2 RFC1398 MIB 3 6710MIB MIB NOTE If you are using HP OpenView for Windows use the OpenView Control SNMP Manager Manage Database menu items to add the previous listed MIBs to the HP OpenView MIB database If you are not using HP OpenView for Windows consult your network management station user s guide for instructions on adding MIBs MIB Il Information MIB II is for use with network management protocols in TCP I P based internets The 6710 Access Point supports most of MIB II Table G 1 contains the major groups G 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB Table G 1 MIB Il Information MIB Family OID Purpose Groups System 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 Model and device type Interfaces 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 1 O ports AT 1 3 6 1 2 1 3 Table of IP to MAC DLC address IP 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 IP process ICMP 1 3 6 1
58. or inbound entry was added or the time when the secondary entry was added or re attached brgEntry 6 OB ECT IDENTIFIER nBridge 4 The Addr Table Table Definition addrTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AddrEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Each entry in this table provides address information for all OWL nodes in the network This table exists only at the root node addr 2 Row Definition addrEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AddrEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX addrDestination addrTable 1 Columnar Object Definition AddrEntry SEQUENCE addrDestination PhysAddress addrAge NTEGER addr Nodel d NTEGER addrAlias DisplayString addrDeviceld NTEGER addripAddress pAddress Leaf Definition 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 63 APPENDIXG M B addrDestination OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The 802 address of the registered port addrEntry 1 addrAge OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The time in minutes since the entry was updated addrEntry 2 addr Nodeld OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 16 bit 0 65535 node port ID addrEntry 3 addrAlias 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 16 ACCESS read only S
59. read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Description of sdStatus field softwareDownLoad 5 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 73 APPENDIXG M B sdCheckPoi nt 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON An application variable intended to contain a number relating the progress of the current software downl oad softwareDownLoad 6 sdSetActivePointers OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON f the device reboots due to the expiration of the pwrNextPwrUpTime timer this value specifies which active pointers will be toggled prior to rebooting softwareDownLoad 7 sdTermi nate OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Terminate the current software download softwareDownLoad 8 G 74 6710 Access Point User s Guide Glossary Access Point Access points provide the following functions A wired bridgeis an access point that attaches to the network through an Ethernet link and has bridging enabled through access point configuration menus A wired bridge converts wireless LAN frames to Ethernet frames and Ethernet frames to wireless LAN frames A wired bridge also forwards wireless LAN frames to wireless LAN nodes A designated bridgeis an access point that bridges frames to and from a secondary Ethernet LAN A des ignated b
60. servers on the network If the DHCP server name is configured with a null string the access point responds to offers from any server 4 20 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration The dass identifier string for the access point is Norand Access Point Servers usethis string to identify the access point Bootp Operation The access point can also accept addresses from a Bootp server identified in the DHCP server name field An address offer from a Bootp server is treated as if it were an infinite lease from a DHCP server Networks With DHCP and Bootp Servers If the DHCP server name is configured as the access point responds to either DHCP or Bootp servers The access point gives preference to DHCP offers If a Bootp reply arrives at the access point before any DHCP offers are received the access point waits an additional 4 seconds for a DHCP offer before responding If a DHCP offer is received within the 4 second period the Bootp reply is ignored and the DHCP offer is accepted Handshaking When the access point responds toa DHCP or Bootp server it broadcasts a single ARP request to the address offered If no ARP response is received within 3 seconds the access point assumes the P address is unique and completes the negotiation for that address If an ARP reply is received before the timeout the access point assumes the address is a duplicate and dedines the offer Infinite Leases A DHCP serv
61. set the parameters to the access point s default settings 9600 8N1 full duplex If you have already changed the default settings set the parameters to those you set in FLASH mode through the configuration menus 2 Plugthe access point into the outlet These messages appear QX S6700K version lt date gt Press any key within 5 seconds to enter the ROM monitor Executing file USTART29 BIN from segment segment number Quickly press a key to perform configuration before startup Starting system 3 Toaccess the configuration menus wait until you see the message Quickly press a key to perform configuration before startup Press any key to access the configuration menus 4 See Configuring the Access Point on page 4 12 4 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Accessing the ROM Command Monitor 1 Settheterminal emulation parameters in your communications software If you are configuring this access point for the first time set the parameters to the default settings for ROM mode 9600 8N1 full duplex If you have already changed the default settings set the parameters to those you set in ROM mode through the ROM command monitor 2 Plugthe access point into the outlet These messages appear QXS6700K version lt date gt Press any key within 5 seconds to enter the ROM monitor Executing file USTART29 BIN from segment segment number Quickly press a key to perform configuration
62. starts on the page given below community Community Table page G 52 trapTarget Trap Target Table page G 55 Table G 15 community TABLE Device SNMP v1 Configurations norand manage norandN et nSNM P v1Config x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 11 1 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 2 1 1 communityl ndex INTEGER read 2 12 communityStatus INTEGER write 2 1 3 communityN ame DisplayString write 2 1 4 communityPrivileges INTEGER write Table G 16 trapTarget TABLE Device SNMP v1 Configurations norand manage norandN et nSN M P v1Config x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 11 1 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 3 L1 trapTargetl ndex INTEGER read 3 1 2 trapTargetStatus INTEGER write 3 L3 trapTargetName DisplayString write 3 1 4 trapTargetl pAddress pAddress write 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 17 APPENDIXG M B Bridging Parameters The following groups contain objects relating to the wireless transparent bridging operation NOTE The MIB definition for each group starts on the page given below rt Route Table page G 56 brg Bridge Table page G 61 addr Address Table page G 63 brgState Bridge State Information page G 64 bridgeStats Bridge Statistics page G 69 Table G 17 rt GROUP Device Route Table norand manage norandN et nBridge rt x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 17 2 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 2 11 rtDestination PhysAddress read 2 1 2 rtPort INTEGER read 2 13 r
63. with connected nodes that must receive multicast or broadcast frames Answer Setting Yes Inbound M ulticast Primary Outbound to Secondaries M ulticast Registered Or Inbound M ulticast E nabled Outbound to Secondaries M ulticast Registered Comments You can usethe settings listed in the above chart in combination with a Flood Register setting of Multicast for selected secondary Ethernet LANs if nodes in the radio network that must receive broadcast or multicast frames are restricted to those LANs You should use the Outbound to Stations E nabled setting if wireless stations must receive multicast frames For example TCP IP wireless stations may need to receive broadcast ARP requests You can use Ethernet filters to reduce multicast flooding for any Inbound or Outbound to Secondaries setting other than Disabled 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 35 SECTION 4 Configuration S UHF Flooding Level Because of its low bandwidth S UHF is vulnerable to excess traffic from busy backbones The recommended settings for S UHF is Inbound Disabled and Outbound to Secondaries Disabled for the multicast and unicast options These settings prevent excessive traffic from being forwarded onto the RF medium Flood Register You can use the Inbound option and Outbound to Secondaries option in combination with the Flood Register setting for the Ethernet port You can configure the network so that unicast or multicast frames are flooded o
64. 2 16 24 Uni cast 172 16 24 Uni cast 172 16 32 Uni cast 172 16 32 Uni cast 172 16 40 Uni cast 172 16 40 Uni cast 172 16 48 Uni cast 172 16 48 UNUNUN MJ 1 2 3 4 3 6 7 8 Option B Directed Broadcast In this example a directed broadcast address is used for each subnet The broadcast to address 172 16 23 255 is received by all access points on subnet 172 16 16 0 The access point with the highest bridge priority provides the remote termination of the OWL IP tunnel for each subnet A broadcast MAC address is used This option supports primary and fallback access points on up to eight subnets 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 21 APPENDIXE OWL P Type Address Broadcast 172 16 23 255 Broadcast 172 16 31 255 Broadcast 172 16 39 255 lt Broadcast gt 16 47 255 Uni cast 0 0 Uni cast 0 0 0 Uni cast 0 0 0 Uni cast 0 0 c0 c O1 R wn n Option C All Subnets Broadcast In this example an All Subnets broadcast address is used This broadcast is forwarded throughout the network and received by designated bridges on all subnets See Comments on the next page before using the All Subnets broadcast Directed broadcast is the preferred implementation for larger system installations Type Address Broadcast 172 16 248 255 Uni cast 0 0 0 Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast 1 2 3 4 5
65. 2 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 4 1 1 nifxlndex INTEGER read 4 12 nifxType INTEGER read 4 1 3 nifxlnDisabledDiscards Counter read 4 1 4 nifxlnOverruns Counter read 4 1 5 nifxlnHWOverruns Counter read 4 1 6 nifxlnUcastDPkts Counter read 4 1 7 nifxlnNUcastDPkts Counter read 4 1 8 nifxlnLenErrors Counter read 4 1 9 nifxExcessiveDeferrals Counter read 4 1 10 nifxl nN etl DDiscards Counter read 4 1 11 nifxl nF ragDiscards Counter read 4 1 12 nifxI nUF ilterDiscards Counter read 4 1 13 nifxI nNUFilterDiscards Counter read 4 1 14 nifxl nQFullDiscards Counter read G 12 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB Table G 11 portState GROUP Device Port State Information norand manage norandN et nl nterfaces portState x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 2 3 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 4 1 1 psPort INTEGER read 4 1 2 psiflndex INTEGER read 4 1 3 psAddress PhysAddress read 4 1 4 psType INTEGER read 4 1 5 psState INTEGER read 4 1 6 psCost INTEGER read 4 1 7 psHelloPeriod INTEGER read 4 1 8 psHelloCount Counter read 4 1 9 psMacdWindow INTEGER read 4 1 10 psM acdQSize Gauge read 4 1 11 psM acdTimeouts Counter read 4 1 12 psl sPrimary INTEGER read 4 1 13 psl sSecondary INTEGER read 4 1 14 psl ssecondaryCandidate INTEGER read 4 1 15 psSecondaryU niF looding INTEGER read 4 1 16 psSecondaryM ultiF looding INTEGER read 4 1 17 pslsRadio INTEGER read 4 1 18
66. 3 SeeSection 6 Indicator Lights for descriptions of the indicator lights 3 20 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION3 Installation Cj es ww 10 BASE 2 10 BASE T DIAG AC INPUT 100 240 VAC C 1 Receptacle on power cord 2 Three prong plug Figure 3 15 AC Power Input Connection 6710 Access Point User s Guide 3 21 SECTION3 Installation 3 22 6710 Access Point User s Guide Section 4 Configuration This section describes how to Create a local DIAG port Telnet and Web browser session with the access point Access the access point s FLASH and ROM Set up the access point through its configuration menus You can configure the access point locally through its DIAG port or remotely through Telnet or a Web browser The following chart shows the sessions you can use to do other tasks Task DIAG Port Telnet Browser Change configuration pass v v v words Modify the configuration v v v Upgrade FLASH v v Check the FLASH version v v Access ROM v Check the ROM version v Use online help v v v 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 1 SECTION 4 Configuration Only one type of session can be running at a time For example if someone starts a Telnet session while someone else is configuring the access point through its DI AG port the configuration through the DIAG port will terminate Creating a Local DIAG Port Session In summary you establish a local DIAG port session wit
67. 32 6710 Access Point User s Guide F 1 APPENDIX F Portand Cable Pin Outs AUI Port Pin Outs The following chart defines the signals present on the pins for the AUI port Pin numbering is from left to right and top to bottom For example pin 1 is on the top left of the connector and the last pin is on the bottom right Pin Number Signal Name GND Data Data Not used Data GND Not used Not used Data Data Not used Data 12 V dc Not used Not used O ON AU BPWN HG PPPPPe uBWNF OO F 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXF Portand Cable Pin Outs DIAG Port Cable DIAG Port to 9 pin Male PC Port Standard Null Modem Cable Part Number 226 106 001 6 feet 6710 PC Pin 6 Pina i 3 og 3 2 1 4 6 Pin 9 Pin 5 5 5 Pin 9 6710 6 4 PC 9 pin D sub 9 pin D sub Female 8 8 Female SHELL GND 6710 Access PointUser s Guide F 3 APPENDIX F Portand Cable Pin Outs F 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide Appendix G MIB Product Contents The 6710 Access Point MIB is on disk part number 215 894 001 Order the MIB through your Sales Representative The following products are available for management of the open wireless LAN INCA LAN HP OpenView for Windows OWLView for HP OpenView for UNIX OWLView for HP OpenView for Windows About This Product The 6710 Access Point MIB is packaged to provide basic network management capability for the
68. 4 21 handshaking 4 21 infinite leases 4 21 network with servers 4 21 operation 4 21 RFC 4 22 server 2 12 4 21 Bootstrap Protocol See Bootp Border Gateway Protocol E 5 Bracket Industrial Locking Mounting 2 19 mounting 2 16 3 2 3 9 Bridge 4 14 4 23 Bridge ports 2 7 4 38 Bridge priority 4 57 4 58 Bridges designated See Designated bridges translating 2 2 2 4 Bridging 4 41 4 57 Bridging definition Glossary 2 functionality 2 2 general concepts 2 2 layer 2 4 network organization 2 4 pending messages 2 5 Bridging parameters MIB groups G 7 Broadcast Glossary 2 Broadcast address 4 83 4 84 Browser 3 6 4 88 C Cable LMR400 B 6 Cable connector Type N B 6 Cable prep tool B 6 Cable terminator 3 3 3 11 Cable type 4 41 4 42 Cables 3 6 4 3 F 3 Callsign 4 76 Index 2 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Ceiling mount 3 9 Changing passwords 4 86 Changing the configuration 4 13 4 14 Channel 900 MHz radio 4 74 definition Glossary 2 WLIF radio 4 62 4 67 Channelization C 1 D 1 Checklist configuration guide 4 92 default and site settings 4 7 flooding level 4 31 Checkpoint variable 5 19 Class B address 4 16 E 19 Class C address E 13 Class identifier string 4 21 Clear command 4 13 Clearing the configuration 4 13 Clients applications 4 33 Bootp 2 12 DHCP 2 12 4 19 4 21 TFTP 2 13 5 8 5 16 CMOT MIB family G 3 Collecting the equipment 3
69. 4 43 6710 Access Point User s Guide Z Advanced Functions Through DIAG Port or Remotely Using Telnet or HTTP Secondary LANs Set the Flood Register values page 4 59 in designated bridge candidates if Global Flooding options are set to Registered page 4 30 Secondary LANs and OWL IP Set the Bridge Priority in all designated bridge candidates page 4 57 OWL IP Configure all super root candidates to Originate if Root page 4 82 and configure the IP Addresses Table in each candidate page 4 83 OWL IP Configure TX Filter in super root candidates and designated bridges page 4 84 Section 5 Software Download This section describes the file system structure File Menu commands and ROM command monitor for the access point File System Structure The access point s file system has four separate segments analogous to a directory in most computer file systems Boot Segments 1 and 2 The first two segments 1 and 2 are 75 Mb boot segments Either boot segment can hold the bootable executable FLASH file USTART29 BIN which loads when you reboot the access point You can store different versions of USTART29 BIN in the boot segments and then configure the access point to use one of them Data Segments 3 and 4 The next two segments 3 and 4 are 25 Mb data segments Either data segment can hold the data file for the 900 MHz radio FALCON_D 29K or the synthesized UHF radio SYNUHF_D 29K
70. 43 1 Is the open wireless LAN used only with NORAND emulation terminals Answer Settings Yes Inbound U nicast Disabled Inbound M ulticast E nabl ed Outbound to Secondaries U nicast Disabled Outbound to Secondaries M ulticast Disabled Comments Unicast flooding is not required to support NORAND terminal emulation because the NORAND transport layer used for terminal emulation periodically generates traffic Inbound multicast flooding is required Outbound multicast flooding is not required because NORAND terminal emulation stations do not need to receive multicast frames 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 31 SECTION 4 Configuration 2 Doesthe network contain only 900 MHz or S UHF access points Answer Settings Yes Inbound U nicast Disabled Outbound to Secondaries U nicast Disabled Comments Unicast flooding is never required for 900 MHz or S UHF access points since stations supporting these media options establish reliable connections as they roam between access points The correct port for S UHF or 900 MHz stations is always known 3 Doall nodes in the radio network routinely transmit a frame at least once every 4 minutes Answer Settings Yes Inbound U nicast Disabled Outbound to Secondaries U nicast Disabled 4 Doany nodes in the radio network need to receive multicast or broadcast messages Answer Settings No Inbound M ulticast E nabl ed Outbound to Secondaries M ulticast Disabled Note TCP IP nod
71. 46 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB ptxqRegQSi ze 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Current regular queue size 0 REG Q MAX The number of regular priority packets which are currently queued for transmission on the port r ptxgEntry 2 pt xqRegQMax OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The maxi mum number of regular priority packets which can be queued for transmission on the port ptxqEntry 3 ptxqExpQSi ze OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Current expedited queue size 0 EXP Q MAX The number of expedited packets which are currently queued for transmission on the port r ptxqEntry 4 pt xqExpQMax OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The maxi mum number of expedited packets which can be queued for transmission on the port ptxgEntry 5 pt xqQHpCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of attempts to queue a high priority packet for transmission ptxgEntry 6 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 47 APPENDIX G M B pt xqQExpCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of attempts to queue an expedited priority packet for transmission ptxqEntry 7 pt xqQRegCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTA
72. 5 6 7 8 Each linein the IP Addresses Table contains one IP address entry Settings are Type Uni cast gt Address 0 0 0 0 Type The Type setting specifies the type of Ethernet MAC address used by the super root when forwarding frames through the OWL IP port This setting allows flexibility in configuring OWL IP routing In most cases IP and MAC address types should match The MAC frame type and IP address in combination dictate how GRE encapsulated frames are forwarded to IP routers Settings are Uni cast Multi cast Broadcast 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 83 SECTION 4 Configuration Setting Description Unicast Standard IP routing is used Frames are default forwarded to the unicast MAC address of the router This is either the default router specified in the Tcpip configuration menu of the access point or an alternative router assigned by ICMP redirect Multicast Reserved for future use Broadcast OWL IP frames are sent using an Ethernet broadcast address This capability allows use of directed and All Subnes IP addressing Address The Address setting is the target IP address of the access point to which OWL IP frames are addressed The address should be consistent with the type unicast multicast or broadcast The prompt is Range is 4 nums 0 255 Entries are deared by setting addresses to 0 0 0 0 TX Filter Configuration of filters for the OWL IP port is done using the trans
73. 50 Password Configuration menus top level password The default password is CR52401 case insensitive For security the password appears as asterisks on the screen Save this password If you check this option the brows in your password er saves the password You do not list need to select this option because the Resource number changes every time you access this screen NOTE Only one computer at a time can access the configuration menus If you unexpectedly receive a request for the user name and password another user may be trying to view or modify the configuration through Telnet or the DIAG port If a different computer tries to start another Web browser session it is refused until the current session logs out Following is the initial screen that appears after you enter the correct user name and password Configure the access point by following the directions provided on this screen and the help screens In addition this user guide s Index lists the page numbers for all menu options 4 90 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Access Point Configuration fatermec Configuration Menus Review write Changes Logout Reboot Security Once you ve successfully entered the user name and password into your browser you are authorized to access the configuration If five 5 minutes elapses without configuration activity you will become unauthorized again Only one computer at a time is allow
74. 66 Overview ssseeees ehh ETHERNET Lights 0 STATUS Lights tta acacia ison ca wien edet qu rs STAT WS tot us tro ona ob wade mela testam o sandy Ate MODE tascicrspeno tte cee PDC dee ead NETWORK MODE Lights 0000 0s PEM GIA LIONS ortu Sed Gin tae Sawa tee aed Power Up Sequence 6 i eee APPENDIX A Access Point Specifications seres Product Specifications 0c eee eee eee eee Electrical Specifications 0 cece eee eee Environmental Specifications 000008 Physical Characteristics 0 cece cece 6710 Access Point User s Guide 5 26 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 29 5 29 5 29 5 31 5 31 6 1 6 2 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 APPENDIX B CONTENTS WLIF Specifications and Antennas Radio Operation 0 c eects Part Numbers Antenna Regulations 0 0 Whip Antenna Remote Antenna Ki Medium Gain P US Seatac eae ecco eau cute ac UCI iier eese CD E IPs Medium Gain Collinear Dipole High Gain Colli High Gain Yagi near Dipole 0 cece eee Antenna Adapter Cable 00 0 c cece eee Model 2100 Antennas and Cables s 2 4 GHZ ANtENNAS 0 n nn 2 4 GHz Antenna Cables and Connectors APPENDIX C 900 MHz Specifications and Antennas Radio Operation 0
75. 7 PQ command 4 5 5 25 5 27 Predicting coverage D 5 Preparing for installation 3 2 Primary 4 29 Primary LAN SeeDistribution LAN Processor A 1 Product OIDs MIB group G 7 G 8 Index 9 INDEX Programmable filters 4 52 Protocols See also specific protocols network 2 3 4 28 4 44 4 79 Proxim 2 4 GHz radio See WLIF radio Proxy ARP server 2 7 Publications 1 3 Put command 5 12 PWD command 5 23 5 25 Q QFSK 4 72 Quadrature Frequency Shift Keying 4 72 R R LINK light 6 2 Radio network definition Glossary 7 required flooding levels 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 setting filters in 4 31 Radio options 2 9 4 65 Radio ports 2 9 4 38 RAM segment description 5 3 field description 5 7 mnemonic 5 3 not erasing 5 8 script commands 5 13 Ranges 900 MHz fragment size 4 27 900 MHz radio C 1 advanced password 4 87 auto ARP minutes 4 22 awake time 4 27 beacon frequency 4 70 bridge priority 4 57 callsign 4 76 channel 4 62 DHCP server name 4 20 expression sequence 4 53 fragment acknowledgment retry 4 73 fragment QFSK retry 4 73 Ranges Continued fragment size 4 71 IP router 4 18 IP subnet mask 4 17 LAN ID 4 23 mask 4 54 normal acknowledgment retry 4 72 normal QFSK retry 4 73 offset 4 54 password 4 86 root priority 4 24 S UHF radio D 1 security ID 4 60 static addresses 4 43 subchannel 4 62 target IP address 4 84 UHF fragment size 4 27 UHF RF
76. 710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Select primary and fallback super root access points on the home subnet P addresses for wireless stations used with OWL IP must belong to the home subnet See OWL IP limitations in Appendix E Select access points on each remote subnet to serve as designated bridges for those subnets Configure primary and fallback bridge priorities under the Bridging menu described on page 4 57 Configure and record the IP addresses of all designated bridges Designated bridge candidates must have permanent IP addresses DHCP should not be used to assign IP addresses to OWL IP designated bridges unless a permanent lease is specified and the access points are rebooted prior to configuring OWL I P It is not necessary to configure Global Flooding or Flood Register settings for OWL IP designated bridges These do not apply to OWL IP designated bridges Use the OWL I P menu to configure super root candidates to Originate if Root described on page 4 82 Configure the IP Addresses Table page 4 83 using the appropriate addressing for designated bridges on each subnet All super root candidates should be configured identically Configure OWL IP TX Filter settings in all super root and designated bridge candidates A discussion of TX Filter starts on page 4 84 For networks using IP networking on wireless stations use of the ARP server capability in the access point is strongly r
77. BASE T twisted pair through ports on bottom panel Card slots Two PC card compatible slots Mounting options Tabletop wall or ceiling Electrical Specifications The access point has one EC connector for industry standard three conductor ac input The access point s internal power supply automatically detects the voltage level and frequency of the source power Following are source power specifications Voltages Autosensing 100 110 220 240 V ac Frequency 50 to 60 Hz Safety UL CSA Underwriters L aboratory Canadian Standards Association United States and Canada CB Competent Body report for Europe 6710 Access PointUser s Guide A 1 APPENDIXA Access Point Specifications The access point complies with the following standards Immunity EN Euro Norm 50082 1 Generic I mmunity Standard and ETS European Telecommunica tion Standard 300 339 Radio Equipment and Systems Generic EMC Electromagnetic Com patibility for Radio Equipment Emissions FCC Class B verified and CISPR 22 EN 55022 Class B radiated and conducted emissions under EN 50081 1 Generic Emissions Standard Comite International Special des Perturpations Radio electurques I nternational Special Committee on Radio Interference Environmental Specifications Operating temperature 22 F to 122 4F 30 4C to 50 1C standard Humidity Remains operational when exposed to 90 percent humidity noncondensing conditions NOTE Operat
78. C Parms Hop Period 200 ms Beacon Frequency 2 Deferral Slot Default Fairness Slot Default Fragment Size 310 Transmit Mode AUTO Norm Ack Retry 255 Frag Ack Retry 255 Norm QFSK Retry 255 Frag QFSK Retry 255 900 MHz radio port Name omdflca MAC Address Unique number Status Enabled Hello Period 1 second F alcon File Name falcon_d 29k Mode Channel First mode in list ARP Server Mode Disabled 4 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide Option S UHF radio port Name MAC Address Status Hello Period UHF File Name Call Sign Frequency Master Mode Attach Priority OWL IP port Name MAC Address Status Hello Period OWL IP Mode IP Addresses Type Address TX Filter F rame Types Action Scope SubTypes 1 Action SubType Scope SubTypes 2 Action SubType Scope SECTION 4 Configuration Default Site Setting omduhfb Unique number Enabled 2 seconds synuhf_d 29k empty string First frequency in list Disabled High omdi p Unique number Enabled 2 seconds Listen Unicast None Pass Unlisted Pass Various subtypes Various settings Pass DIX IP TCP Port 00 00 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 11 SECTION 4 Configuration Configuring the Access Point When you create a local DIAG port or remote Telnet session with the access point the configuration program s password screen appears Configuration of Access Point Copyright c 1995 1997 Norand Corporation A
79. DESCRI PTI ON The number of physical sectors Afile Segment consists of one or more adjacent physical sectors fsinfo 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 25 APPENDIXG M B fsSectorSize OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The size of a physical sector in bytes fsinfo 3 fsNumSegments OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of logical file segments 0 MAX SECTORS fsinfo 4 fsNumFil es OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of files 0 25 fsinfo 5 fsBootSegment 0BJECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The index of the current boot segment If the index is non zero and the first file in the associated segment is executable then control is passed to that file during the power up sequence fsinfo 6 fsDataSegment OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The index of the active data segment Files stored in this segment will be accessible to an executing application fsinfo 7 segment OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER file 2 The File Segment Table Table Definition G 26 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB segTable 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SEGEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON segment 2 Row Def
80. E x T id 1 a E EN ud 1 oe n MN lt n Wee EL s X 7 100 wireless stations maximum in overlap area four frequencies Figure D 3 Increased System Throughput Frequency and Separation Guidelines When using overlapping access points you must provide minimum physical separation between access point antennas The recommended minimum frequency separation between frequencies used within an installation is 200 KHz with separation of 1 MHz preferred n some cases you may need to use separations as small as 40 KHz for 20 KHz spacings or 50 KHz for 25 KHz spacings because of regulatory limitations In this case the physical separation between access point antennas must be increased The recommended minimum physical separation between access points is 30 meters 100 feet Absolute minimum separations are based on frequency separation as indicated in the following chart Frequency Separation Absolute Minimum 50KHz 100 feet 30 meters 200 KHz 20 feet 7 meters D 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide Appendix E OWL IP Introduction Wireless networks may be installed in environments that are segmented by IP routers If OWL IP is not enabled the presence of a router generally defines the physical boundary of the wireless network Wireless coverage can be provided by installing multiple independent wireless networks each with its own LAN ID super root and set of
81. E 8 PC card slots 2 17 S UHF PC card assembly 3 19 sample network 2 15 T connector 3 3 Telnet session 4 6 vampire tap 3 5 Web browser session 4 89 WLIF PC card assembly 3 17 Immunity A 2 Inbound and flood register 4 36 ARP requests 4 37 definition Glossary 4 description 4 28 flooding frames 4 29 flooding level checklist 4 31 menu option 4 28 4 30 OWL IP flooding E 4 E 6 OWL IP frames E 11 required flooding levels 4 31 S UHF radio flooding level 4 36 Indicator lights 2 17 6 1 Industrial Locking Mounting Bracket 2 19 Infinite leases 4 21 Installation applying power 3 20 checking default configura tion 3 1 collecting the equipment 3 2 connecting to Ethernet 3 10 finding the best location 3 7 general guidelines 3 7 MIBs G 2 mounting the access point 3 8 PC cards 3 17 preparing for 3 2 S UHF radio D 5 site survey 3 7 Inter Domain Policy Routing Protocol E 5 Inter Domain Routing Protocol E 5 Interface MIB groups G 7 Interfaces MIB family G 3 Interference 4 68 4 69 Interior Gateway Protocol E 5 Interior Gateway Routing Proto col E 5 INTERMEC antenna adapter cable B 5 International Organization for Standardization 2 3 Internet Control Message Proto col SeelCMP IP Addresses 4 82 4 83 IP addresses access point 4 16 4 22 ARP requests 4 22 ARP server mode 4 36 Bootp 4 19 DHCP 4 19 OWL IP configuring 4 83 destination 4 80 E 2 fram
82. Ethernet 2 18 3 10 Connectors B 6 Control MIB group G 7 Countries 900 MHz radio 4 74 C 2 S UHF radio 4 77 D 2 WLIF radio B 2 Coverage area 900 MHz radio C 1 designated bridge 4 58 extending D 6 S UHF radio 4 77 D 1 D 5 wireless access points Glossa ry 10 WLIF radio 4 62 B 1 Creating DIAG port session 4 2 script files 5 13 Telnet session 4 6 Web browser session 4 88 wireless hop 4 65 Customer Response Center 1 4 Customer support 1 4 INDEX Data segments activating 5 5 5 6 description 5 1 displaying 5 6 erasing 5 15 5 31 mnemonic 5 3 script file 5 14 Decimal values 4 47 E 4 E 18 DECnet 2 3 Default MAC configuration 4 68 4 69 Default settings changing configuration to 4 13 list of 4 7 OWL IP E 3 OWL IP filters E 3 E 6 Deferral slot 4 69 4 70 Define File Segment command 5 25 5 26 Delay flooding 4 36 4 37 Designated bridges allocating IP addresses 4 20 bridge priority 4 57 candidates 4 57 configuring as Slave 4 61 definition Glossary 1 Glossa ry 2 flooding 4 30 4 43 overriding flood register 4 59 OWL IP avoiding wireless bridging E 3 configuring 4 81 4 85 example E 15 E 16 E 19 E 21 forwarding frames E 4 E 6 E 11 operation E 7 E 10 5 25 5 27 station mobility E 12 Community name G 4 D subnet filtering E 6 Community string G 5 Data bits 4 4 4 5 ene Ug dE Compliances Data Link Layer 2 3 S UHF radio 4 57 900
83. FF OFF Internal serial loop back test failed ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON Internal MACE AUI loopback test failed ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF Internal 1OBASE T loopback test failed ON OFF OFF ON ON ON Timer test failed 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 6 3 SECTION6 Indicator Lights NOTE Error Status Hardware errors 1 2 and 3 Internal serial loop back test failed Internal MACE M edia Access Con troller for Ethernet AUI loopback test failed Internal LOBASE T loopback test failed Timer test failed MODE Contact the Customer Response Center for help with the following Description These errors indicate an internal hard ware error or malfunction The errors can occur when you apply power to the access point If it encounters a hardware error it no longer functions This failure occurs if the access point does not successfully complete the power on self test The error indicates a probable hardware malfunction associated with the DIAG port In most cases the unit continues to operate nor mally but the error condition still exists This failure occurs if the access point does not successfully complete the power on self test The error indicates a probable hardware malfunction associated with the AUI port In most cases the unit continues to operate nor mally but the error condition still exists This failure occurs if the access point does not successfully complete the power on self test Theerror indica
84. Figure 3 3 Figure 3 3 Cable With RJ 45 Plugs 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 3 3 SECTION3 Installation 10BASE5 Components 1OBASE 2 components include the proper lengths of 10BASE5 coax cable an AUI drop cable less than or equal to 50 feet 15 meters long and a transceiver Twotypes of transceivers arethe intrusive N Series transceiver and the nonintrusive vampire tap The N Series transceiver Figure 3 4 is a T shaped connector with a 15 pin AUI port and twotype N connectors This transceiver is intrusive because network service is disrupted while the coaxial cableis cut and a threaded N series connector placed on each end of the cable A 10BASEF fiber optic adapter may be attached directly tothe AUI connector Figure 3 4 N Series Transceiver The vampire tap is an insulation piercing damp device that damps onto the coaxial cable Figure 3 5 The vampire tap pierces the coaxial cable s insulation and makes contact with the shield and inner conductor without cutting the cable 3 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION3 Installation Figure 3 5 Vampire Tap Communication Equipment You can access the access point s system software configuration menus locally through the unit s DIAG port or remotely through a Telnet session or Web browser Local DIAG Port Access For local access you need the following Third party communications software terminal emulation package with Y modem capability such as
85. Local DIAG Port Access naunau auar Telle sunset edita TRO IE ep Web Browser ssssssseeee eh Network Management Platform s Finding the Best Location ssessseeseeeee Site SUV OY isole euo emm rte ne donne Ae nur tue General Installation Guidelines Mounting the Access Point sssssssssssessleeee Horizontal Tabletop Mount sssss Vertical and Ceiling Mounts ussuuussss 6710 Access Point User s Guide NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN PRP RPP PPP PPP ppp WOWOONDKRBRWWWWNNNNBRP EH LI D 00 00 4 4 4 OY OY OY U1 Ul 4 UJ UU NO NO NB S CONTENTS Connecting to Ethernet 0 ccc eee 1OBASE2 Ethernet End of Segment 2c Middle of Segment 0 cee eee ee eee 1OBASE5 Ethernet N Series Transceiver sse Vampire Tap lOBASE T Ethernet 0 cece eee eens Installing PC Cards WLIF oc bi cares 900 MHz S UHF Applying Power SECTION 4 Configuration Creating a Local DIAG Port Session sese Accessing the Configuration Menus Accessing the ROM Creating a Telnet Sessi Default and Site Settin TEPA P e Security Bridge Command Monitor Olla edit aret edes tr SR rte in o MM n Configuring the Access Point cece eee e eens Main Menu Using the View Command
86. M X xx is the version of the ROM command monitor MMM DD YYYY isthe month day and year the version was released ap is the command prompt 5 22 6710 Access PointUser s Guide NOTE SECTION5 Software Download Viewing ROM Commands To view ROM commands type any invalid command such as to display the command monitor s Main Menu Reboot Run Flash Boot File Ymodem File Download Password Menu Move file to Flash Norand Password Menu File System Directory Serial Baud Rate The following paragraphs describe each option When executing a command that has an option for example Fx s separate the option from the command by a space Reboot resets the access point s system software Reboot is similar to turning the access point off removing power and then starting it up again reapplying power FXs FX s performs a Y modem batch protocol download of a file into the specified s FLASH segment Typing FX 1 2 3 or 4 depending upon which FLASH segment you want the file loaded to automatically copies the file to the specified FLASH segment FD FD displays the FLASH file system directory induding information about the boot file See Fd Command on page 5 6 for more information 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 23 SECTION5 Software Download FR NOTE The first executable file in the access point boot segment must be the access point boot file FR finds the first executable file
87. MHz radio C 1 Data rates selection 4 58 ed Pal D EE 2n Wa DE S em Desti nati on addresses 2 3 4 28 WLIF radio B 2 WLIF radio B 1 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Destination U nreachable E 6 DGP E 5 Index 3 INDEX DHCP client 2 12 4 19 definition Glossary 2 menu option 4 16 4 19 OWL IP tunneling 4 20 RFCs 4 22 server name 4 16 4 20 DIAG port cables F 3 connecting to PC 4 2 4 3 description 2 18 Dimensions A 2 Direct sequence 4 75 C 1 Glos sary 3 Disabling ARP server mode 4 36 4 37 designated bridge 4 58 DHCP 4 19 4 20 Ethernet port 4 40 flood register 4 59 flooding 4 29 4 30 global parameters 4 27 Master mode 4 77 4 78 radio port 4 40 Discarding frames 4 45 4 62 4 63 4 84 Dissimilar Gateway Protocol E 5 Distribution LAN definition Glossary 3 designated bridge in coverage area 4 58 filtering 4 31 flooding 4 33 4 34 frame flooded toward 4 28 OWL IP E 7 E 9 super root candidates 4 24 wireless hops 4 65 4 67 DIX 0800 Internet Protocol E 5 adding header 4 41 default OWL IP filters E 6 definition Glossary 3 filtering 4 44 4 84 filtering example 4 48 4 50 E 17 forwarding frames E 5 IP frame type 4 19 menu option 4 19 4 41 OWL frame type 4 41 DIX ARP Ethernet filter 4 46 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 E 18 DIX EtherType 4 47 DIX IP Other Protocols Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85
88. OWL IP is disabled and must be manually enabled before tunnels are originated Additionally once enabled default filter settings prevent forwarding of all protocols except NORAND Network Layer NNL ARP for P address resolution and ICMP which supports diagnostic capabilities such as PING Extensive filtering capabilities are provided to allow traffic to be restricted to that known to be destined to wireless stations 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 3 APPENDIXE OWL P Addressing Limitations and Flooding Restrictions Wireless stations using IP must be assigned addresses on the home subnet The ARP server capability can be enabled to reduce propagation of ARPs through tunnels IP servers can be located on any subnet however it is desirable to choose the subnet containing servers used extensively by dient wireless stations as the home subnet if possible For stations or servers using protocols other than IP there are norestrictions on location of servers or address assignments Routing is minimized if servers are located on the home subnet OWL I P does not flood outbound unicast frames Multicast P frames are forwarded outbound from the home subnet Designated bridges forward unicast and multicast frames inbound to the home subnet if the IP address belongs to the home subnet See Subnet Filtering page E 6 Global Flooding settings and Flood Register settings do not apply to OWL IP tunnels Permanent Filters Certa
89. Omdpxmb 4 38 4 39 Omduhfb 4 38 4 39 Omni antennas B 6 Online help 4 1 Op 4 53 4 54 Open Shortest Path First Interi or Gateway Protocol E 5 Open system Glossary 6 Operating temperature 900 MHz radio C 1 S UHF radio D 1 WLIF radio B 2 Organizationally U nique I denti fier 4 47 Originate if Root 4 82 OSPFIGP E 5 OUI 4 47 Outbound 4 28 E 11 Glossa ry 7 Outbound to secondaries and flood register 4 36 4 59 menu option 4 28 4 29 required flooding levels 4 31 S UHF radio 4 36 Outbound to stations menu option 4 28 4 30 required flooding levels 4 32 4 33 4 35 Output power B 1 C 1 D 1 OWL frame type 4 41 OWL I P 4 38 4 39 4 79 OWL IP addressing limitations E 2 E 4 building the spanning tree E 9 configuration examples E 13 default settings E 3 E 6 establishing tunnels E 10 filtering 4 84 E 3 E 4 flooding 4 81 E 4 flooding restrictions E 4 frame forwarding E 11 functional overview 2 10 installation limitations E 2 menu options 4 82 Mobile IP comparison E 12 operation E 7 overview 4 79 password security E 7 OWL IP Continued permanent filters E 4 redundancy E 10 safeguards E 3 station mobility E 12 subnet filtering E 6 tunnel configuration E 9 P Parameter Problem E 6 Parity 4 4 4 5 Part numbers 900 MHz radio C 2 antenna adapter cable B 5 cable terminator 3 3 cables 3 6 4 3 F 3 high gain collinear dipole an tenna B 4 high
90. P is used to obtain the P address If the IP address is 0 0 0 0 and DHCP is disabled TCP IP access to this access point is disabled A discussion of DHCP starts on page 4 19 IP Subnet Mask P subnets partition traffic and are connected by routers The subnet mask indicates how many bits of the IP address represent a network number and how many indicate a host number The prompt is Range is 4 nums 0 255 The default is 255 255 255 0 Following are suggestions for setting the subnet mask If you are installing this access point on an existing Ethernet segment the subnet mask should match the other computers on the segment If you are using the 172 16 h h address suggested for P Address you may want to use a subnet mask of 255 255 248 0 This mask provides the network 172 16 with 30 subnets of 2046 computers each The IP address breakdown is 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 17 SECTION 4 NOTE Configuration 16 bits of network address 5 bits of subnet address Do not use all O s or all 1 s 11 bits of host address Do not use all O s or all 1 s The following chart lists IP addresses when the submask is 255 255 248 0 Subnet First Address Last Address 1 172 16 8 1 172 16 15 254 2 172 16 16 1 172 16 23 254 3 172 16 24 1 172 16 31 254 30 172 16 240 1 172 16 247 254 If you are using DHCP to obtain an IP subnet mask for this access point the subnet mask obtained from DHCP overrides the setting for the IP
91. P threshold 4 27 value 4 56 value ID 4 55 4 56 WLIF radio B 1 RAP E 5 Read command 4 13 4 14 Read Only M emory Glossary 8 Reading the configuration 4 14 Reboot command 4 14 5 16 5 23 Receiver sensitivity D 1 Redirect E 6 Redundancy definition Glossary 7 designated bridge E 10 super root 4 25 4 80 E 10 Registered 4 29 4 30 Regulatory compliances B 2 C 1 D 2 Remote antenna kits B 3 C 3 Remote session 4 6 4 88 Remote subnet definition 4 79 Glossary 7 designated bridge on 4 79 E 2 establishing tunnels to E 10 example E 16 frame forwarding E 11 number supported E 13 operation E 7 redundancy E 10 restricting frame types 4 84 Index 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide Reset Modem Init String com mand 5 25 5 28 Resetting the configuration 4 13 Resource number 4 90 Reusing frequencies D 7 RFC 1533 4 22 RFC 1534 4 22 RFC 1541 4 22 RFC 2002 E 12 RFC 951 4 22 RFC1213 MIB G 1 G 2 RFC1398 MIB G 1 G 2 RIP E 5 RM 111 See S UHF radio RM 160 See 900 MHz radio RM 180 SeeWLIF radio RMI command 5 25 5 28 ROM 1 1 5 9 Glossary 8 ROM command monitor 5 22 Root 4 23 4 24 Root node See Super root Root priority menu option 4 24 Slave radio 4 67 spanning tree E 9 E 10 super root redundancy 4 25 super root selection 4 25 Root subnet Glossary 8 Route Access Protocol E 5 Router Advertisement E 5 Router protocol types E 4 Router Selection E 5 Rou
92. RI PTI ON Received OWL packets with errors pstcEntry 5 pstcOut OWLPkts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Total OWL packets sent pstcEntry 6 G 42 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB pstcOutUcastOWLDataPkts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Total unicast OWL data packets sent pstcEntry 7 pstcOutNUcastOWLDataPkts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Total multicast OWL data packets sent pstcEntry 8 pstcOutOWLErrors 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON OWL packet send errors pstcEntry 9 pstcParentLinkErrors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Root port send link errors pstcEntry 10 pstcAlertLinkErrors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Link errors which generated an ALERT pstcEntry 11 pstclnUcastRelayPkts OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Recei ved unicast relay packets pstcEntry 12 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 43 APPENDIXG M B pstcl nNUcastRel ayPkts 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Received multicast relay packets pstcEntry 13 pstcOutUcastRel ayPkts 0BJ ECT
93. Run Flash Boot File command FR on the ROM command monitor s Main Menu Software Download Example TheFLASH program for the access point is called USTART29 BIN A simple method for upgrading an access point with new FLASH isto set one up as a TFTP server and then download new FLASH into another access point the dient This method is simple because you can easily configure an access point as a TFTP server The general procedure is as follows 1 Upgrade one access point with a new version of FLASH through the DI AG port 2 Enablethe upgraded access point as a TFTP server 3 UseTelnet and TFTP to upgrade another access point dient This procedure may also download new HTML and GIF files which enable you to configure the access point through a Web browser Upgrading Through DIAG Port The following pages show an example of how to upgrade an access point through its DIAG port This unit will become the TFTP server The example assumes that 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 29 SECTION5 Software Download You have established a connection between a PC and the access point s DIAG port and have accessed the ROM command monitor An old version of FLASH is in segment 1 The new version of FLASH is going into segment 1 Segment 2 is the active boot segment 1 When the access point has entered the ROM command monitor type the following commands to upgrade the unit Command Description ap gt pwd Enter the pass
94. Secondaries Multicast or Unicast option is set to Enabled Multicast Enables multicast flooding The super root disables multicast flooding if the Outbound to Secondaries Multicast option is set to Disabled No unicast flooding occurs The super root enables unicast flooding if the Outbound to Secondaries Unicast option is set to Enabled Unicast Enables unicast flooding The super root disables unicast flooding if the Outbound to Secondaries Unicast option is set to Disabled No multicast flooding occurs The super root enables multicast flooding if the Outbound to Secondaries Multicast option is set to Enabled See page 4 29 for moreinformation about Outbound to Secondaries 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 59 SECTION 4 Configuration Setting Enabled Description Multicast and unicast flooding occurs The super root disables flooding if the Outbound to Secondaries Multicast or Unicast option is set to Disabled See page 4 29 for more information about Outbound to Secondaries Global flooding settings in the super root take precedence over Flood Register settings WLIF Options NOTE Appendix B provides additional information about the WLIF radio Use WLIF to set Proxim 2 4 GHz radio options Security Id NORANDOWL Node Type lt Master gt Master Parms MAC Config Default Manual MAC Parms NOTE Slave P arms appears instead of Master Parms if Node Type is set to
95. Server Log saves a history of TFTP client requests The command s format is File gt tftp server log The TFTP server log contains useful TFTP server status information starting from when you set up the server You must reboot the access point to clear the log TFTP Client Commands The TFTP dient in the access point supports standard Get and Put commands 5 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 SECTION5 Software Download Get Use Get on an access point dient to download software from a TFTP server a PC or another access point The format is File gt tftp get ip address foreign file name gt local file name ip address is the IP address of the server or which indicates the value of the Serverl pAddress variable described later in this section foreign file name is the name of the file to get from the server The file name can contain directory path information and must be in the format required by the server s operating system The file must have an appropriate 29K file header Boot files and data files are normally delivered with the proper file header attached but script files you create must have the file header appended before transfer to an access point local file name is the name of the file to be stored in the access point The name must indude a segment number or name followed by a colon and an optional file name If only the segment name is supplied
96. Slave Manual MAC Parms appears if MAC Config is set to Manual Security Id Security Id prevents unauthorized wireless stations from associating with this access point The prompt is Range is 20 chars 4 60 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION4 Configuration The default security ID is NORANDOWL All WLIF access points and wireless stations in the network must have the same security I D to communicate The security ID is case sensitive That is if the access point s security ID is in uppercase the wireless station s must also be in uppercase Refer to the wireless station s user guide for more information about setting its security ID Node Type Node Type determines if this radio is a Master to which wireless stations attach or is a Slave radio that must attach to a Master Configuration of a WLIF radio as a Slave is necessary if the access point is configured as a wireless access point or the designated bridge for a secondary LAN Configuration as a wireless access point requires installation of two WLIF radios one Master and one Slave The Master radio services stations local to the wireless access point The Slave radio provides communications between the wireless access point and the network infrastructure Figure 4 4 on page 4 65 shows a network example Node Type options are Master Slave Setting Description Master The port is configured to communicate with default wireless stations Slave Th
97. Subnet Mask option IP Router The IP address of the router is required only if this access point will communicate with devices on the other side of the router P Router identifies the default router used to forward data frames to addresses on another subnet The prompt is Range is 4 nums 0 255 The default is 0 0 0 0 which disables the ability to exchange TCP IP traffic with another subnet or network 4 18 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration A router that connects subnet 1 to subnet 2 might have the address 172 16 8 1 on subnet 1 and 172 16 16 1 on subnet 2 A host with IP address 172 16 16 5 would specify an IP router address of 172 16 16 1 to reach host 172 16 8 10 P routers are usually configured so a computer only needs to know one router s address This is true even if several routers on the segment connect to several other segments If you are using DHCP to obtain an IP router address and the DHCP server specifies a default IP router the DHCP server specification overrides the setting for IP Router IP Frame Type IP Frame Type sets the type of frame containing IP traffic DI X 802 3 Setting Description DIX default Sets Ethernet type to DIX Ethernet 2 0 for IP frames 802 3 Sets Ethernet type to 802 3 with a SNAP header for IP frames Select 802 3 if other network computers use SNAP encapsulation for IP frames DHCP DHCP provides a way for this access point the dient
98. TATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON An alias for the 802 address 5 2 addrEntry 4 addrDeviceld OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Device ID 0 65535 An OWL node can optionally set a device ID in a registration request PDU addrEntry 5 addripAddress 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I pAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 32 bit IP address for IP nodes e g APs 5 2 addrEntry 6 brgState OB ECT IDENTIFIER nBridge 6 The Bridge State Group G 64 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB bsAddress 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 802 address of the AP brgState 3 bsLanl d 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 0 254 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON OWL LAN ID 0 254 brgState 4 bsCostToRoot OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Path cost to the root brgState 5 bslsRoot OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE if the AP is the root brgState 6 bslsAttached OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE if the AP is attached brgState 7 bsAttachld OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read
99. TAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Recei ved unicast packets passed to the data link interface pstcEntry 22 pstcl nNUcastTol FC OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Received multicast packets passed to the data link interface pstcEntry 23 pstcOutDel ayDi scar ds 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Send packets discarded due to excessive delay pstcEntry 24 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 45 APPENDIXG M B ptxq OBJECT IDENTIFIER ninterfaces 5 ptxqTable 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF PTXQEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The Port Transmit Queue Table ptxq 1 ptxqEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX PTXQEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX ptxqPort ptxqTable 1 PTXQEntry SEQUENCE ptxqPort NTEGER ptxqRegQSize Gauge ptxqRegQMax NTEGER ptxqExpQSize Gauge ptxqExpQMax NTEGER ptxqQHpCount Counter ptxqQRegCount Counter ptxqQExpCount Counter ptxqQHpDi scar ds Counter ptxqQRegDi scar ds Counter ptxqQExpDi scar ds Counter ptxqMul ti QSize Gauge pt xqMul ti QMax NTEGER ptxqMul tiQDiscards Counter ptxqPort OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R port ID 1 4 A number which uniquely indentifies the port r ptxgqEntry 1 G
100. THERNET Indicator Lights Light Status Indication LINK ON Unit has successfully attached to the Ethernet network OFF Unit has not attached to the Ethernet network POLARITY OFF TX and RX lines on a 10BASE T cable are reversed STATUS Lights STATUS indicator lights are labeled STATUS and MODE 6 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION6 Indicator Lights STATUS The STATUS left light indicates the access point s operating status When the light is OFF the access point is operating normally When the light is ON it is in error mode NOTE In certain cases the following text refers to the indicator lights by number Lights are numbered from leftto right Light 1 is labeled LINK and Light 8 is labeled NIC2 The access point enters error mode when it detects a malfunction during the power on self tests or when certain hardware malfunctions occur during normal operation When the STATUS light is ON to indicate the error mode indicator lights 4 through 8 the STATUS MODE light and the NETWORK and PCMCIA light pairs display a binary error status code between 1 and 31 This code indicates the specific condition causing the error status as shown in Table 6 2 Descriptions of errors are on page 6 4 Table 6 2 Error Mode Status Codes Status Mode R LINK W LINK NIC1 NIC2 Error Status ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Hardware error 1 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF Hardware error 2 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON Hardware error 3 ON OFF OFF ON O
101. TION4 Configuration The number includes retries that occurred in QF SK mode and should be larger than Norm QF SK Retry A value of 255 default indicates that the radio may choose an optimum value Frag Ack Retry Frag Ack Retry is the number of times any fragmented frame QF SK or BFSK is resent unsuccessfully before failure The prompt is Range is 1 255 Frag Ack Retry should be larger than Frag QFSK Retry A setting of 255 default indicates that the radio may choose an optimum value Norm QFSK Retry Norm QFSK Retry is the number of times an unfragmented QFSK frame is resent unsuccessfully before switching to BFSK when Transmit Modeis AUTO The prompt is Range is 1 255 Theretries that occur are also counted by Norm Ack Retry Norm QF SK Retry should be smaller than Norm Ack Retry The default is 255 Frag QFSK Retry Frag QFSK Retry is the number of times a fragmented QFSK frame is resent unsuccessfully before switching to BFSK when Transmit Mode is set to Auto The prompt is Range is 1 255 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 73 SECTION 4 Configuration The default is 255 Theretries that occur are also counted by Frag Ack Retry Frag QFSK Retry should be smaller than Frag Ack Retry 900 MHz Options NOTE Appendix C provides additional information about the 900 MHz radio Use Falcon to set 900 MHz radio options File Name falcon d 29k Mode Channel DS 225K Channel 25 File N
102. TUS mandatory INDEX brgDestination brgTable 1 Columnar Object Definition BRGEntry 5 SEQUENCE brgDestination PhysAddress brgPort NTEGER brgAge NTEGER brgType NTEGER brglsPermanent INTEGER brgTi mest amp Ti meTi cks Leaf Definition 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 61 APPENDIXG M B brgDestination 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The 802 address of the destination brgEntry 1 brgPort OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R port ID 1 4 A number which uniquely identifies the port brgEntry 2 brgAge OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Time in minutes since the entry was updated brgEntry 3 brgType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER primary 1 secondary 2 out bound 3 i nbound 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Entry Type primary secondary out bound inbound brgEntry 4 1 2 3 4 n brglsPermanent 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE if the entry is permanent brgEntry 5 G 62 6710 Access Point User s Guide addr APPENDIXG MIB brgTi mestamp 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Ti meTi cks ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The ti me when the primary
103. Table G 8 dir GROUP Device Software Directory Listing norand manage norandN et nSystem file dir x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 1 3 3 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 2 1 1 dirlndex INTEGER read 2 12 dirName DisplayString read 2 13 dirSegment INTEGER read 2 1 4 dirType INTEGER read 2 15 dirSize INTEGER read 2 16 dirDate DisplayString read 2 17 dirTime DisplayString read 2 18 dirVersion DisplayString read Table G 9 criticalErrors GROUP Device Critical Errors Information norand manage norandN et nSystem sysE rrors criticalErrors x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 1 4 1 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 1 ceE nabled INTEGER read 2 ceOverflow INTEGER read 3 ceReset INTEGER write 4 1 1 ceLogErrorCode INTEGER read 4 1 2 ceLogErrorCount Counter read 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 11 APPENDIXG M B Interface Information The following groups relate information about Norand interfaces port state port statistics port transmit queue and pending message services NOTE The MIB definition for each group starts on the page given below nifx Norand Extensions to nterfaces Table page G 32 portState Port State Information page G 36 portStats Port Statistics page G 41 ptxq Port Transmit Queue page G 46 pmsg Pending Message Services page G 49 Table G 10 nifx GROUP Norand Extensions to MIB II Interfaces Table norand manage norandN et nl nterfaces nifx x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 2
104. The Slave access point synchronizes with Masters whose channel and subchannel appear in the list of configured Masters Precedence is given by the order of the list Master 1 has highest precedence Master 8 has lowest Channel and subchannel settings can be 0 where 0 means do not care For example You can set the Master 1 channel to 0 and subchannel tol The Slave synchronizes with any Master on any channel as long as the Master s subchannel is 1 You can set the Master 1 channel to 0 and subchannel to 0 which means do not care The Slave synchronizes with any Master Remember that Any Master with which the Slave is allowed to synchronize must have Wireless Hops enabled A Slave station must have a root priority of O A Slave station must not be allowed to synchronize with a Master connected to its own secondary LAN MAC Config Use MAC Config options to enhance the performance of the WLIF radio Options are Default Interference Throughput Manual NOTE An inefficient MAC Config radio setting can adversely affect the performance of your open wireless LAN You should change MAC Config radio settings only under the direct supervision of a Systems Engineer 4 68 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION4 Configuration Setting Description Default Uses the factory set settings for the radio proto default col settings are located under Manual MAC Parms The Default setting should be used
105. US mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 802 address of the parent AP brgState 14 bsPortCount 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Number of MAC R ports brgState 15 bsNodel d OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 16 bit node ID 0 65535 The node ID uniquely identifies the node in an OWL LAN brgState 16 bsRootChangedCount 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Number of times that the root has changed brgState 17 bsRoot Count 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Number of times that the AP became the root brgState 18 bsAttachCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Number of times that the AP has changed from an unattached state to an attached state brgState 19 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 67 bsDetachReason SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Last detach reason code reason that the AP became unattached for occurrence 0 Initial Value A new root node was detected The network inactivity timer expired A better path to the root was detected The node s parent became unattached The node was in a detach list in a HELLO PDU The node was functioning as the root and relinqui shed the root status 9 The maxi mu
106. X Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of attempts to queue a regular priority packet for transmission ptxqEntry 8 ptxqQHpDiscards OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of failed attemts to queue a high priority packet ptxgEntry 9 ptxqQExpDiscards OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of failed attemts to queue an expedited priority packet ptxgEntry 10 ptxqQRegDiscards OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of failed attemts to queue a regular priority packet ptxgqEntry 11 G 48 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB ptxqMul ti QSize OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Current multicast queue size The number of multicast packets which are queued for transmission on the radio port Multicast packets are transmitted after HELLO packets on OWL radio ports ptxgqEntry 12 ptxqMul ti QMax OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The maximum number of multicast packets which wil be queued for transmission on the radio port ptxqEntry 13 ptxqMultiQDiscards OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of failed attempts to queue a Multicas
107. a rules Canadian Computer Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing E quipment Regulations Cet appareil numerique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le material boilleur du Canada Canadian Spread Spectrum Radio Certification This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device NOTICE Canadian 2 4 GHz Radio License This device requires a radio license unless it is installed totally inside a building Users must obtain this license Une licence radio est requise pour ces dispositifs sauf pour ceux install s tout fait l int rieur d un b timent Il faut que l utilisateur obtienne cette licence Telephone Installation Warning Notices The following notices apply to equipment that may be connected to telephone lines or systems For your personal safety and to protect this equipment from potential electrical or physical damage do NOT connect equipment to telephone lines or data communication equipment unless the following warnings have been read understood and complied with i Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm i Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifi ca
108. able Type Cable Type specifies the type of Ethernet medium to which the access point is connected It is recommended that you explicitly set the cabletype Settings are l0BaseT 10Base2 AUI Auto Detect Setting Description 10BaseT Selects the RJ 11 connector sets type to 10BASE T twisted pair The cable type defaults to LOBASE T if no traffic is heard on any Ethernet port LOBASE 2 10BASE5 or 1OBASE T during a 10 second time window when the access point starts up 10Base2 Selects the BNC connector sets type to 10BASE 2 thinnet AUI Selects the AUI 15 pin D sub connector sets type to 1OBASE5 thicknet and other types Auto Detect Automatically selects the correct cable type by default listening for traffic on the Ethernet ports during initialization For this to work the access point must be connected to the Ethernet medium during system start up and another device on the Ethernet medium must be transmitting at least one frame every 10 seconds Static Addresses Use Static Addresses to define a list of 20 or fewer permanent unicast 802 MAC addresses connected to this Ethernet port The Static Address Table displays the addresses 4 42 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 Select an address then type 6 hexadecimal pairs for the new address at the prompt Range is 6 hex pairs Static
109. access point you used as the server by typing File gt tftp server 5 32 6710 Access Point User s Guide stop Section 6 Indicator Lights This section describes the access point s indicator lights and how to read them This section also provides troubleshooting information you can use to isolate a faulty access point Overview The eight indicator lights on the access point s front panel arethe best indicators of how the unit is working By observing the indicator lights you can tell the following Mode in which the unit is operating error network boot or command Type of network link the unit has established when it is in network mode Baud rate of DIAG port when in command mode Possible cause of an error condition when in error mode The indicator lights are grouped into four pairs Figure 6 1 ETHERNET STATUS NETWORK MODE PCMCIA LINK POLARITY STATUS MODE R LINK W LINK NIC1 NIC2 Figure 6 1 Indicator Lights 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 6 1 SECTION6 Indicator Lights Each indicator light is labeled according to function The following chart lists the groups and their indicator lights Group Indicator Lights ETHERNET LINK and POLARITY STATUS STATUS and MODE NETWORK MODE R LINK and W LINK PCMCIA NIC1 and NIC2 ETHERNET Lights ETHERNET indicator lights show the status of the access point s Ethernet connection Table 6 1 shows what the lights mean when ON and OFF Table 6 1 E
110. addresses become permanent entries in the route table This is useful when configuring designated bridges for secondary LANs since it reduces the need to flood frames to wired stations on the secondary LAN segment See page 4 57 for discussion of designated bridges for secondary LANs Normal RX Filter Ethernet filters allow elimination of frame types that do not need to be forwarded to wireless stations The main benefit of filtering is reduction in unnecessary wireless transmissions Options are Frame Types SubTypes 1 SubTypes 2 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 43 SECTION 4 Configuration F rame Types allows filters to be established for common networking protocols such as IP Novell IPX and 802 2 LLC Logical Link Control Separate selections are available for each of the three Ethernet standards DI X Ethernet 2 0 802 3 and 802 3 SNAP A filter may be configured to pass or drop all frames of a given type Alternatively filters may be set to operate on selected subtypes within each frame type category SubTypes 1 lists several predefined frame types as well as user defined frametypes Settings under SubTypes 2 allow additional user defined frame subtypes to be spedified The default access point configuration passes all frame types Frame Types F rame Types options are Action Scope DI X I P TCP Ports Pass Unlisted DI X I P UDP Ports Pass Unlisted DI X IP Other Protocols
111. ages 4 40 E 9 Hello period 4 38 4 40 Help online 4 1 Hexadecimal values E 18 High gain collinear dipole anten na B 4 High gain yagi antenna B 5 High priority 4 78 Home subnet addressing limitations E 2 E 4 E 13 description 4 79 example E 15 E 19 flooding restrictions E 4 frame forwarding E 11 subnet filtering E 6 super root on 4 79 E 2 Hop period 4 69 4 70 Hops between beacons 4 70 definition Glossary 4 Glossa ry 9 wireless example 2 15 S UHF radio D 3 WLIF radio 4 62 4 65 Horizontal mount 3 8 HP OpenView for Windows G 1 HTTP 2 13 4 45 4 89 Humidity specifications A 2 Hypertext Transfer Protocol 2 13 4 45 4 89 Index 6 6710 Access Point User s Guide ICMP IP routing 4 84 not filtered 4 45 OWL IP filtering E 3 forwarded frame type 4 84 forwarding frames out bound E 11 frame types not forwarded E 3 E 5 ICMP MIB family G 3 Identifier string 4 21 IDPR E 5 IDRP E 5 IEEE address SeeMAC address IGP E 5 IGRP E 5 Illustrations 6710 Access Point 2 1 900 MHz PC card assembly 3 18 AC power input connection 3 21 access point functions 2 2 cable terminator 3 3 cable with RJ 45 plugs 3 3 Class B configuration E 20 Class C configuration E 14 components 2 16 connecting to 10BASE T 3 16 10BASE 2 3 11 3 12 10BASE5 3 14 3 15 DIAG port connection 4 3 INTERMEC antenna adapter cable B 5 mounting bracket 3 9 N series transceiver 3 4 OWL IP tunnel
112. ame FileNameis the name of the radio s driver software Only change this name when directed to do so by a Systems Engineer Normally the programs file name should not be changed Mode Channel Mode sets the bit rate option for the 900 MHz radio Generally the higher the bit rate the lower the range of the access point Channel defines a frequency range that is a small portion of the available bandwidth Various communication modes are available which enable you to balance the need for radio coverage with the need for speed Select the Mode Channel option to display the list of mode and channel combinations which are country dependent 4 74 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration For example in the United States the following combinations are valid Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel The following chart describes the settings shown in the previous sample screen Setting DS 225K Channel 25 DS 090K Channel 10 through DS 090K Channel 40 DS 450K Channel 25 Description Uses one Direct Sequenced channel at 225 000 bits per second This one moderate speed channel uses all avail able bandwidth DS 225K is mode 1 Use one of several Direct Sequenced channels at 90 000 bits per second Seven low speed channels share the available bandwidth DS 90K is mode 2 Uses one Direct Sequenced channel at 450 000 bits per second This one high spee
113. ame of the script to be retrieved from the TFTP server Thefile name can contain directory path information and must be in the format required by the operating system running on the server The format of the ScriptF ilename variable is File sdvars set scriptfilename foreign file name This command line sets the script name to SCRIP T DAT File gt sdvars set scriptfilename script dat StartTime StartTimeis a relative time at which to begin the software download process The value of this variable is how long into the future the access point will begin the software download process by downloading the script file If you do not want to start the software download process after setting this variable you can set this variable to zero 5 18 6710 Access Point User s Guide EXAMPLE SECTION5 Software Download As long as the StartTime has not counted to zero on its own the timer stops and the software download process halts When the timer does count down to zero it uses the Serverl pAddress value and the ScriptF ilename value to get the script file If either of these is not set an error is noted in the status variable and the software download process is aborted The variable s format is File sdvars set starttime dd hh mm ss This command line sets the download start time to begin in 5 minutes File sdvars set starttime 00 00 05 00 Status Status is a read only variable set by the software download mechanis
114. an OWL IP tunnel For Ethernet secondary LANs a wireless link is established between an access point on the distribution LAN and a designated bridge on a secondary Ethernet segment Frames to or from a secondary Ethernet LAN are bridged at the MAC layer In the case of OWL IP a virtual MAC layer link is established through an IP tunnel between the super root and a designated bridge 6710 Access Point User s Guide E 7 APPENDIXE OWL P AP 3 Designated Bridge a ACE Wireless Station Wireless Station Wireless Station FigureE 1 Secondary LAN AP 3 Designated Bridge Distribution LAN IP Router Home Subnet Secondary LAN Remote Subnet IP Router Wireless Station Wireless Station Wireless Station Figure E 2 OWL IP Tunnel E 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P Following are three primary differences between secondary LANs separated by wireless links and secondary LANs separated by OWL IP tunnels Any access point on the distribution LAN can provide wireless connectivity for a designated bridge on a secondary Ethernet LAN Only the super root can originate OWL IP connections to designated bridges on remote subnets Flooding parameters for designated bridges on secondary Ethernet LANs can be adjusted through the global settings in the super root or through local configuration in the designated bridge Flooding parameters for OWL IP tu
115. anagement information is obtained with the proper COMMUNITY name Intermec provides three levels of access This table outlines the levels with the required community name G 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB NOTE Community strings are case sensitive Community String Access Type Description of Access Type public READ ONLY May read MIB objects but not write or change values EXCLUSIONS Will not be able to read or writethe Community Table CR52401 READ WRITE May read MIB objects May write to MIB objects that have read write access EXCLUSIONS Will not be able to read or write the Community Table secret SUPER USER May read MIB objects May write to MIB objects that have read write access Can read and write the Community Table The names of the community strings for each community or access group are stored in norand manage norandNet nSNMP vi1Config communityTable Thesethree records may be viewed and modified if used with the SUPER USER community There is a maximum allowing for three levels of access Records may be added or deleted via setting the communityStatus object to enable disable or delete The first row in the CommunityTable isreserved for the SUPER USER community definition This record is not removable This is a fixed record to ensure read write access to the MIBs on the 6710 Access Point Notethe communi tyName for the first record can be changed to ensure end user control of sec
116. ange Default UHF Rfp Threshold 0 250 octets 70 UHF Frag Size 0 250 octets 250 Falcon Frag Size 0 250 octets 250 Awake Time 0 255 tenths of seconds 0 6710 Access Point User s Guide 4 27 SECTION 4 NOTE NOTE Configuration Global Flooding Use the same Global Flooding settings in all super root candidates Use Global Flooding to set system wide flooding options The settings are sent throughout the network when and if this access point becomes the super root Options are Multicast Unicast Inbound Primary Disabled Outbound to Secondaries Disabled Disabled Outbound to Stations Disabled Disabled An access point normally forwards frames only to destination addresses it has learned and stored in the forwarding database Frames are forwarded only on the port that provides the shortest path to the destination address The access point can be configured to flood frames on one or more ports when the destination address is unknown Global flooding options allow for different flooding configurations to optimize performance Settings in the super root are distributed to all other access points A frame flooded toward the distribution LAN LAN segment containing the super root is inbound A frame flooded away from the distribution LAN is outbound A special case of outbound is outbound to secondary LANs A Flooding Level Checklist starts on page 4 31 Inbound Flooding may be configur
117. ard frames 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Glossary 3 GLOSSARY Frame A frameis a series of bytes of data encapsulated with a header and trailer Frame is often used interchangeably with packet although technically a packet refers to data from the network layer of the protocol stack Frequency Agile The frequency agile system software allows access points to be individually configured to operate on one of several pre programmed frequencies Wireless stations are pro grammed with a list of all frequencies used in the installed access points and change frequencies in order to roam be tween access points Access points may be installed with overlapping coverage using different frequencies to increase throughput Currently no provision exists to allow frequency agile op eration on a subset of the available frequencies Frequency Hopping Hop Frequency hopping is a spread spectrum technique by which the band is divided into a number of channels and the transmissions hop from channel to channel is in a speci fied sequence Hop is used in vector distance routing and is equal to one data link A path to the final destination on a net is ase ries of hops away from the origin Inbound Frames Frames sent toward the distribution LAN are inbound Glossary 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide GLOSSARY IP Subnet An IP subn amp is a single member of the collection of hard ware networks that compose an IP network Host a
118. argetEntry 2 trapTarget Name OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 16 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The authoritative name for the trapTarget trapTargetEntry 3 trapTargetl pAddress OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX IpAddress ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON IP Address of manager which is assumed to be bound to amp listening on port 162 trapTargetEntry 4 nBridge OB ECT I DENTIFIER rt OBJECT IDENTIFIER The RT Table Table Definition rtTable OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF RTEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON norandNET 17 nBridge 2 Each entry in this table provides routing information for child nodes which are reachable via a route r rt 2 G 56 6710 Access Point User s Guide Row Definition rtEntry SYNTAX RTEntry ACCESS not access STATUS mandatory I NDEX rtDestina rtTable 1 Columnar Obj ect RTEntry SEQUENCE rtDestination Port Age Nodel d Attachl d AttachTi me ApEaddr HopAddrLen rtHopAddr 16 rtHopEaddr rtlsBound rti sRemote rtisChild rtlsAp rtisDistributed rti sRemoteLan rtNS rtNR a o Sie oc X Sian Leaf Definition rtDestination SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The 802 address of rtEntry 1 rtPort SYNTAX I NTEGER 1 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The MAC R port ID
119. arts Save all the paperwork you received If the access point appears to be damaged contact the Customer Response Center for instructions on returning the unit for replacement The shipment contains the access point with FLASH and the following items Mounting bracket AC power cord Warranty card Collecting the Equipment Before you install the access point onto the network collect the equipment you will need Ethernet LAN Components The access point directly connects to TOBASE2 10BASE T or 1OBASE5 Ethernet medium Consult a cabling reference for maximum run lengths and node limits for Ethernet wiring 3 2 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION3 Installation 10BASE2 Components 1OBASE 2 components include a T connector a cable terminator and the proper lengths of LOBASE 2 coax cable The LOBASE 2 T connector Figure 3 1 attaches to the access point s LOBASE 2 port and connects the access point to the middle or end of LOBASE2 cable Figure3 1 T Connector A cable terminator F igure 3 2 attaches to the T connector It is required for a device connected to the end of LOBASE2 cable The terminator properly terminates the network cable to maintain proper impedance Proper termination is necessary for reliable Ethernet operation Figure 3 2 Cable Terminator 10BASE T Component 10BASE T coax cable is normally used to connect the access point to an Ethernet hub The cable has an RJ 45 plug on each end
120. as the highest nonzero bridge priority If it has the same bridge priority as another access point then it has the highest Ethernet address unless the access point with the highest priority is out of radio range Status The Status option determines if the access point can function as a designated bridge Settings are Enabl ed Di sabl ed Setting Description Enabled default X This access point may function as the designated bridge for the secondary Ethernet LAN Disabled This access point cannot be the designated bridge for the secondary Ethernet LAN The Disabled setting has the same effect as setting Bridge Priority toO The Disabled setting is valuable for debug 4 58 6710 Access PointUser s Guide NOTE SECTION4 Configuration Flood Register As the designated bridge for this secondary Ethernet LAN the access point can register the type of frames it expects to flood unicast multicast or both This information is registered with other access points Setting Global Flooding settings in the super root overrides individual Flood Register settings in designated bridges Flood Register settings are Di sabl ed Multi cast Uni cast Enabled Set the same Flood Register setting in any access point that is a candidate to become the designated bridge for a secondary Ethernet LAN Setting Description Disabled No flooding occurs The super root however default enables flooding if the Outbound to
121. ations 005 2 6 Proxy ARP Server 0 cece ence eee eens 2 7 Bridge Ports 02 4 ll RI eee teed nea bee 2 7 Ethernet Port ccc cece cece eee n eens 2 7 Ethernet Port Filters ssssseeeese 2 8 Radio Ports soccer e bye le ng aes 2 9 OWL IPIP ORD 2h wiin ded Gan eR eee 2 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide i CONTENTS Configuration and Management Configuration s cse pee VOCE EOS Diagnostics and Configuration Port Remote ACCESS 2 ees TGP I PASA cea ae trate deett a ets DHCP Client 0 eee eee Telnet coelo eed ee rr Ren TFTP Client and Server SCHIPEIAG kostete dec eR ete Reque R e Network Management ssssssssessese Sample Configuration 00 cece eee eee Components ir ate ele ean elated pete dor Ri Rod ACCESSO TES oi pak thd ts dana tie ee Selden we wien DEA Power Cold secedere aioe ates Industrial Locking Mounting Bracket SECTION 3 Iristallalon oce on ca rm nx de ea ec unu ncn Checking the Default Configuration Preparing for the Installation 005 Collecting the Equipment 0c cece Ethernet LAN Components sssus LOBASE2 Components sssssn lOBASE T Component sssssss lOBASE5 Components ssessn Communication Equipment ssuuusues
122. before startup Starting system 3 Press any key within 5 seconds of the first ROM message Note that if the access point is in Power U p Quiet mode versus Power U p Normal mode the default setting the ROM messages do not display More information about Power U p Quiet PQ mode and Power U p Normal PN mode starts on page 5 27 in Section 5 Software Download 4 See page 5 22 in Section 5 Software Download for information about the ROM command monitor 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 5 SECTION 4 Configuration Creating a Telnet Session Before you can configure the access point through Telnet you must connect the unit to the Ethernet cable See Section 3 Installation for help You must also perform initial configuration through the DI AG port to Set an IP address or DHCP server name You should also configure a subnet mask and IP router address Set the Ethernet cable type NOTE The access point includes an autodetect feature that senses the Ethernet medium if traffic is present If no traffic is present on the cable the system software defaults to LOBASE T For most installations it is recommended that you explicitly set the Ethernet type The access point must go through its boot sequence before you can create a Telnet session If you reboot the unit while in a session the session terminates You can create a new session after the unit reboots To create a Telnet session see Figure 4 2 a
123. c the access point to 10BASE 2 10BASE5 and 10BASE T Ethernet 3 10 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION3 Installation lOBASE2 Ethernet The access point connects to the end or middle of the 10BASE 2 cable segment NOTE Cable lengths between network devices on the 10BASE2 Ethernet LAN must meet ANSI IEEE standards End of Segment See Figure 3 7 and the procedure following it Q O ea e 10 BASE E 10BASE T AU DIAG N N N AC INPUT 100 240 VAC Cable terminator 50 ohm T connector IOBASE2 cable UJ N IB Figure 3 7 End of 10BASE2 Segment 1 Plug the T connector 2 into the 10 BASE 2 port 2 Plug one end of the Ethernet cable 3 into an open end of the T connector Align the notches in the cable end with the posts on the T connector push the cable in and twist one quarter turn 3 Plug the cable terminator 1 into the other end of the T connector 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 3 11 SECTION3 Installation Middle of Segment See Figure 3 8 and the procedure following it Crees 10 BASER 10 BASE T AUI DIAG N S X AC INPUT 100 240 VAC 1 1 10BASE2 cable 2 T connector Figure 3 8 Middle of LOBASE2 Segment 1 Plug the T connector 2 into the 10 BASE 2 port 2 Plug one end of the Ethernet coaxial cable 1 into an open end of the T connector Align the notches in the cable end with the posts on the T connector push the cable in and twist about one quarter turn
124. ceive transmit r psEn 5 na ou 0 1 2 3 4 ry psCost OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Incremental path cost of the port Default values ether 20 Falcon 100 UHF 255 psEntry 6 G 38 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB psHelloPeriod 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Inter HELLO time 01 secs psEntry 7 psHelloCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON HELLO transmit count psEntry 8 psMacdWi ndow OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Max number of active MAC D transmit requests psEntry 9 psMacdQSize OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Current number of active MAC D transmit requests psEntry 10 psMacdTi meouts OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC D transmit timeout errors psEntry 11 pslsPri mary OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE for primary bridge ports psEntry 12 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 39 APPENDIXG M B pslsSecondary 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE for secondary bridge port
125. cess Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB communityPrivileges 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER get onl y 1 set and get 3 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON SET and GET privileges of community communityEntry 4 Norand trap table defines all trap target IP addresses Table Definition trapTargetTable 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF TrapTargetEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The trap target table specifies the IP address of SNMPv1 managers that expect trap notifications vlConfig 3 Row Definition trapTargetEntry OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX TrapTargetEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Each entry relates to a specific named manager at a given IP address amp belonging to given communi t y NDEX trapTargetindex trapTargetTable 1 Columnar Object Definition TrapTargetEntry SEQUENCE trapTargetindex NTEGER trapTargetStatus NTEGER trapTarget Name DisplayString trapTargetl pAddress lpAddress Leaf Definition 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 55 APPENDIXG M B trapTargetindex 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Identifies the trapTarget row trapTargetEntry 1 trapTargetStatus 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER enabled 1 disabled 2 deleted 3 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Status of a trapTarget record trapT
126. cess point serves as the designated bridge for that subnet AP 4 has the highest bridge priority so AP 3 becomes the designated bridge only if AP 4 fails or loses its network connection AP 5 is the only access point on subnet 192 168 23 0 so no fallback is available Following is the IP Addresses Table for this option Type Address Uni cast 192 168 17 16 Uni cast 192 168 17 188 Uni cast 192 168 23 21 Uni cast 0 0 0 0 Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Option B Directed Broadcast In this example a directed broadcast address is used for each subnet The broadcast to subnet 192 168 17 0 is received by all access points The access point with the highest bridge priority provides the remote termination of the OWL IP tunnel A broadcast MAC address is used Following is the IP Addresses Table for this option E 16 6710 Access PointUser s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P Type Address Broadcast 192 168 17 255 Broadcast 192 168 23 255 Uni cast 0 0 0 0 Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Step 4 Set TX Filters Support for both NNL and IP stations is required This example assumes DI X Ethernet is supported but 802 3 and SNAP are not required NNL is enabled by the default settings Following is the F rame Types screen Action Scope DIX IP Other Protocols Drop lt Unlisted gt Following
127. cess through a Request for Comments RF C compliant TCP IP stack Before initial usage the stack must be initially configured with an IP address and an optional default router through the RS 232 diagnostics port Alternatively the access point may be configured with a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server name The access point then obtains its IP address default router and subnet mask from a DHCP server DHCP Client The access point contains a DHCP dlient allowing it to receive an IP address over the network The DHCP dient supports temporary and permanent leases It also accepts permanent leases from a Bootstrap Protocol Bootp server See Section 4 Configuration for further detail on DHCP operation Telnet Telnet may be used to access the access point s configuration menus The command interface is identical to the command interface through the diagnostics port See Section 4 Configuration for more information about access through Telnet 2 12 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview HTTP The access point supports configuration using HTTP froma workstation equipped with a Web browser Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator is recommended See Section 4 Configuration for more information about access through a Web browser Electronic Software Distribution The access point supports electronic software distribution which allows software upgrades after installa
128. cks write 2 sdServerl pAddress pAddress write 3 sdScriptF ilename DisplayString write 4 sdStatus INTEGER read 5 sdErrorString DisplayString read 6 sdCheckPoint INTEGER write 7 sdSetActivePointers INTEGER write 8 sdTerminate INTEGER write MIB Definitions Following arethe MIB definitions for the 6710 Access Point 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 23 APPENDIXG M B X KO OK OO OO OO OO OO OOOXOOOOXOOOXooooooooobobo bobo bobo bobo bobo bobo bobo bbb bbb bob x i 6710MI B M B Version 1 32 x CK OO OO CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCOCCCCCCCCCOCCCCSSCSS Ce OWL DEFINITIONS BEGIN MPORTS enterprises I pAddress Counter Gauge TimeTicks FROM RFC1155 SMI PhysAddress DisplayString FROM RFC1213 MIB OB ECT TYPE FROM RFC 1212 This MIB module uses the extended OBJECT TYPE macro as defined in RFC 1212 norand OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER enterprises 469 manage OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER norand 1000 products OB ECT IDENTIFIER manage 1 ap6710 OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER products 1 gw4030 OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER products 2 wnas OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER products 3 ts6950 OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER products 4 gwap6910 OBJECT IDENTIFIER products 5 uap2100 OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER products 6 ms d6710 OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER products 7 norandNET OBJECT IDENTIFIER manage 2 nSystem OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER norandNET 1 hw OBJECT IDENTIFIER nSystem 1 T
129. crews Hex nutand lock washer supplied with antenna cable OURUNHB Figure 3 13 900 MHz PC Card Assembly 3 18 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION3 Installation S UHF The S UHF radio option is a Typell PC card that can only be installed in the left hand slot with LEDs facing down To install the card see Figure 3 14 Nonskid rubber feet 4 Access point no radio Sliding latch open for RM111 adapter PC card RM111 Flex circuit RM111 adapter Radio bracket Conductive washer End plate 10 4 40 captive thumb screws 11 4 40 x 25 PH 12 Antenna adapter 0 0 00PRUuUNHB Figure 3 14 S UHF PC Card Assembly 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 3 19 SECTION3 Installation Applying Power B CAUTION NEVER remove the cover of the access point with power applied ALWAYS make the access point connection before making the connection at the source load to source Damage to the radio or other devices can occur with the cover removed NOTE Connect the access point to an uninterruptable power source a power source that cannot be inadvertently turned off or otherwise disconnected Power is applied to the access point through the grounded AC INPUT connector SeeFigure 3 15 and the following procedure 1 Plug the receptacle end of the power cord 1 into the AC INPUT connector 2 Insert the three prong plug on the other end of the power cord 2 into a grounded power outlet
130. d 5 23 Multicast addresses 2 6 4 84 ARP requests 4 36 4 37 definition Glossary 6 flooding and flood register 4 36 4 59 checklist 4 31 inbound 4 28 outbound to secondaries 4 29 outbound to stations 4 30 OWL IP 4 83 S UHF radio 4 36 N series transceiver 3 4 Name port 4 38 4 39 Navigating the menus 4 15 nBridge G 4 nControl G 4 NE operator 4 54 NetBEUI 2 3 NETBIOS Ethernet filter 4 46 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 E 18 NETWORK LIGHT group 6 2 Index 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide Network management 2 14 3 6 NextPowerU pTime variable 5 21 NIC1 light 6 2 NIC2 light 6 2 ninterfaces G 4 NNL default filter setting E 6 Ethernet example 4 51 OWL IP default settings 4 85 E 3 example E 17 E 18 transparent roaming 4 79 predefined Ethernet filter 4 46 wireless station Glossary 6 No flooding 4 36 4 37 4 59 Node type 4 60 4 61 Norand DHCP Server 4 20 Norand Password Menu com mand 5 23 5 24 NORANDOWL security ID 4 61 Norm Ack Retry 4 69 4 72 Norm QFSK Retry 4 69 4 73 Normal flooding 4 36 4 37 Normal RX Filter 4 41 4 43 Novell IPX 4 44 Novell NetWare 4 45 NPWD command 5 23 5 24 nSNMP G 4 nSystem G 4 Null modem cable 3 6 4 3 F 3 0 Object Identification G 4 G 8 Objects management G 1 Octet 4 27 Glossary 6 Offset 4 53 4 54 OIDs G 4 G 8 Omde 4 38 4 39 Omdflca 4 38 4 39 Omdflcb 4 38 4 39 Omdip 4 38 4 39 Omdpxma 4 38 4 39
131. d channel uses all available bandwidth DS 450K is mode 3 900 MHz radio options for a wireless station are set through its Advanced Setup firmware menus Wireless station and access point settings must match Refer tothe wireless station s user guide for more information about Advanced Setup 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 75 SECTION 4 Configuration S UHF Options NOTE Appendix D provides additional information about the S UHF radio Use UHF to set S UHF radio options File Name synuhf d 29k Call Sign d Frequency First frequency in list Master Mode Di sabl ed gt Attach Priority lt Hi gh gt NOTE Attach Priority displays if Master Mode is set to Disabled File Name File Name is the name of the radio s driver software Only change this name when directed to do so by a Systems Engineer Normally the program s file name should not be changed Call Sign NOTE Ignore this option if your site is outside of the United States Call Sign displays your network s callsign The prompt is Range is 12 chars Agencies that allocate S UHF frequencies such as the Federal Communications Commission F CC in the United States may require that this access point periodically transmit a callsign 4 76 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration The callsign is granted as part of the FCC license process Insert the callsign from the F CC license certificate at the callsign prompt Fr
132. d filter for Advanced RX Filter is more complicated than specifying one for Normal RX Filter If possible use Normal RX Filter to set filters Advanced RX Filter options are Expressions Values Expressions Use Expressions to enter expressions used to match the patterns stored in pattern lists to consecutive bytes in received Ethernet frames Settings for Expressions execute in sequence until a determination is made to pass or drop the frame as follows If the last Then listed in this table is Then Drop the table s default is an implied Else Pass If the last Then is Then Pass the default is an implied Else Drop The Value Table displays the filter expressions to be executed 4 52 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration ExprSeq Offset Mask 0p Value Id Action 0 0 EQ 0 And 0 0 EQ 0 And 0 0 EQ 0 And 0 And Filter expressions have the following settings ExprSeq 0 Offset 0 Mask Op lt EQ gt Value Id 0 Action lt Pass gt ExprSeq ExprSeq contains a sequence number that orders expressions in ascending order It is a method of changing the sequence execution The prompt is Range is 0 65535 The default is 0 Change these numbers as needed for reordering After you savethe changes through the Write command the statements are physically reordered and renumbered 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 53 SECTION 4 Configuration Off
133. data segment to be activated Data segments are 3 and 4 or AD active data and ID inactive data EXAMPLE 1 This command makes segment 1 the active boot segment File gt fb 1 6710 Access Point User s Guide 5 5 SECTION5 Software Download EXAMPLE 2 NOTE This command makes segment 1 the active boot segment and segment 4 the active data segment File gt fb 1 4 You can use an asterisk in place of either lt boot segment gt or lt data segment gt to tell the access point to not change that segment For example this command leaves the active boot segment unchanged and changes the active data segment to 4 File fb 4 This can also be accomplished by File fb ab 4 Colons are optional but you can use them for better command consistency Fd Command File Directory USTART29 BIN USTART29 BIN FALCON D 29K SYNUHF D 29K Use Fd to display the FLASH file system directory including information about the boot file For example Boot File USTART29 BIN FLASH boot file gt Boot Address 250ef0 lt boot file s starting address gt Boot Segment 1 lt active boot segment gt Data Segment 3 lt active data segment gt seg type length date ti me ver R E 279299 12 05 97 15 25 58 v01 27 1 E 331444 12 19 97 15 28 22 v01 27 3 D 014965 12 15 97 13 30 01 v02 20 4 D 019159 12 11 97 09 10 35 v02 20 5 6 6710 Access PointUser s Guide NOTE SECTION5 Software Download Following are field de
134. ddress es on a given subnet share an IP network number with hosts on all other subnets of that IP network but the local address part is divided into subnet number and hostnum ber fields to indicate which subnet a host is on IP Wireless Station An IP wirdess station is any PC compatible computing sta tion running IP A PEN KEY computer is an IP wireless station if it is running an off the shelf IP protocol stack LAN Local Area Network A LAN is a group of network devices in which each device can communicate through a wired or wireless link The wired link may be composed of several segments joined by repeaters and bridges TheLAN is characterized by the rel atively short distance it is designed to cover a high speed of operation and relatively low error rates The geographic scope of LANs is limited to thousands of feet or closely spaced building complexes MAC Media Access Control Sublayer TheMAC sublaye is the lower portion of the Data Link layer of the Open Systems I nterconnection OSI model Mobile IP Wireless Station In this user s guide a mobilelP wirdess station is any IP wireless station that can roam across IP subnet boundaries 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Glossary 5 GLOSSARY Multicast Address A multicast address is a form of broadcast address through which copies of the frame are delivered to a subset of all possible destinations with a common multicast address NNL Wireless Station Octe
135. dio port 4 38 4 40 STATUS light group 6 2 Stop bits 4 4 4 5 Storage temperature A 2 Subchannel 4 62 4 67 Subnet filtering E 6 Subnet mask infinite leases 4 21 menu option 4 17 obtaining through DHCP 4 18 4 20 Telnet session 4 6 Web browser session 4 88 Subnets All Subnets addressing 4 84 Auto ARP minutes 4 22 connected by router 4 18 definition Glossary 9 mask 4 20 OWL IP addressing limitations E 4 choosing home subnet 4 80 choosing remote subnets 4 80 choosing super roots 4 81 designated bridge on re mote 4 82 establishing tunnels E 10 examples E 13 E 19 frame filtering 4 84 E 6 frame forwarding E 11 operation E 2 E 7 roaming across boundaries E 1 E 12 servers on E 2 spanning multiple 4 79 subnet mask 4 6 4 17 4 88 SubTypes 1 4 43 4 46 E 17 E 18 SubTypes 2 4 43 4 47 Super root candidates 4 20 4 24 configuring 4 24 description 2 5 Ethernet MAC address 4 83 flooding 4 29 4 30 4 59 Index 12 6710 Access Point User s Guide Super root Continued global flooding 4 28 4 59 global radio parameters 4 25 indicator lights 6 5 OWL IP filtering 4 85 redundancy 4 80 E 2 E 10 tunnel originator 4 79 4 80 redundancy 4 25 selection 4 25 Slave radio 4 67 Support customer 1 4 Synthesized UHF radio SeeS UHF radio Synuhf d 29k 4 76 System information MIB groups G 7 G 9 System MIB family G 3 T T connector 3 3 3 11 Tabletop
136. e 10BASE2 10BASET DIAG TX AC INPUT 100 240 VAC Drop cable 15 pin AUI port Vampire tap 10BASE5 coax PUNB Figure 3 10 Vampire Tap 6710 Access Point User s Guide 3 15 SECTION3 Installation 1OBASE T Ethernet See Figure 3 11 and the procedure following it 10BASE2 ioBASET AUI DIAG TX AC INPUT 100 240 VAC 1 Cable with RJ 45 plugs 2 RJ 45 jack or hub port Figure 3 11 10BASE T 1 Plug the cable with RJ 45 jacks 1 into the 10 BASE T port 2 Plug the other end of the cable into RJ 45 jack or hub port 2 3 16 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION3 Installation Installing PC Cards The following pages describe how to install WLIF 900 MHz and S UHF PC cards WLIF TheWLIF radio option is a Typelll PC card that can be installed in either slot To install the card see Figure 3 12 Nonskid rubber feet 4 Access point no radio PC card RM180 Antenna cable End plate 4 40 captive thumb screws Hex nutand lock washer supplied with antenna cable NOU PWNE Figure 3 12 WLIF PC Card Assembly 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 3 17 SECTION3 Installation 900 MHz The 900 MHz radio option is a Type III PC card that can be installed in either slot Toinstall the card see Figure 3 13 Nonskid rubber feet 4 Access point no radio PC card RM160 Antenna cable End plate 4 40 captive thumb s
137. e held until the station is ready to receive them 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 2 5 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Flooding Configurations Standard LAN bridges flood frames on all ports when the destination address is unknown Additionally many network protocols use multicast addressing for connection and status communications A multicast frame is a special type of frame destined for more than one physical address Standard bridges always flood multicast frames Most wireless media supported in the access point operate at lower media speeds than Ethernet Indiscriminate flooding from a busy Ethernet backbone to a wireless medium can consume a substantial portion of the available wireless bandwidth This reduces system performance even though flooded frames are frequently not intended for stations on a given wireless segment To allow performance tuning the access point provides separate flooding control options for both unicast single physical address and multicast frames Access points serving as designated bridges connecting wired LAN segments may be configured to use different flooding settings than access points serving only wireless stations Two of the wireless media supported in the access point synthesized UHF S UHF and 900 MHz provide reliable attach mechanisms which guarantee that wireless stations are always in the access point s forwarding database Unicast flooding is never required for t
138. e port is configured to communicate with other access points 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 61 SECTION 4 Configuration Master Parms Master Parms contains parameters the access point needs when you configure it as a Master radio Settings are Channel 1 Subchannel 1 Wireless Hops Di sabl ed Channel and Subchannel Channel sets this radios hopping sequence Subchannel enables access points to share the same channel without receiving another access point s frames The prompt for Channel and Subchannel is Range is 0 15 The default for Channel and Subchannel is 1 The channel must be unique for each access point located dose enough together within the same coverage area such that a wireless station may choose to connect with any of them To maximize the available bandwidth the channel and subchannel pair should be unique for each dosely located access point When channels are different among access points an access point cannot receive another access point s traffic An access point discards frames if the channel and subchannel IDs in the frame header do not match the access point s channel and subchannel settings Two access points on different subchannels share the same hopping sequence but behave as if they were on different channels 4 62 6710 Access PointUser s Guide EXAMPLE 1 SECTION4 Configuration Network With 15 or Fewer Access Points If 15 or fewer access points are on the
139. e settings 4 7 Site survey 3 7 Slave beacon frequency 4 70 menu option 4 61 parameters 4 66 synchronizing with Master 4 68 wireless hops 4 65 4 66 4 67 Slave Parms 4 60 4 66 Sname field 4 20 SNAP example E 17 filtering 4 44 header 4 19 4 41 SNAP ARP Ethernet filter 4 46 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 E 18 SNAP EtherType 4 47 E 18 Index 11 INDEX SNAP IP Other Protocols Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 SNAP IP Protocol 4 47 SNAP IP TCP Ports Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 SNAP IP TCP Port 4 47 SNAP IP UDP Ports Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 SNAP IP UDP Port 4 47 SNAP IPX Sockets Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 SNAP IPX Socket 4 47 SNAP Other EtherTypes Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 SNMP 3 6 G 1 SNMP configuration MIB groups G 7 SNMP MIB family G 3 Software download variables 5 17 Source address 2 3 Source Quench E 6 Spanning tree 2 5 E 9 Specifications 900 MHz radio C 1 access point A 1 S UHF radio D 1 WLIF radio B 1 Splitter B 6 SR z command 5 23 5 24 StartTime variable 5 18 Static Address Table 4 42 Static Addresses 4 41 4 42 Station mobility E 12 Status designated bridge 4 57 4 58 Ethernet port 4 38 4 40 indicator lights 6 2 ra
140. e three physical ports OWL IP Restrictions Addressing Limitations Wireless stations using IP must be assigned IP addresses on the home subnet Servers may be located on any subnet However it is preferable to choose the subnet that contains servers for wireless stations as the home subnet if possible Installation Limitations OWL IP tunnels should not be used E 2 6710 Access PointUser s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P For network protocols that an IP router is configured to bridge Many routers may be installed to bridge specific frame types These routers are often referred to as B routers For network protocols a router is capable of routing For example I PX frames should not be tunneled through a router capable of routing both IP and IPX frames f access points are installed sothat a wireless secondary LAN can be established between access points separated by a router it is possible to inadvertently bridge around the router This can be avoided by choosing designated bridge locations or choosing radio channels to avoid inadvertent wireless bridging OWL IP Safeguards The purpose of a router is to segment traffic on a local network and selectively forward frames destined to addresses on other networks OWL IP is designed to minimize the impact on existing installations while supporting mobility for wireless stations The safeguards on the following pages are built into OWL I P Default Settings By default
141. e upgraded the dient Access the client s File Menu On the client type the following commands to upgrade it Description Erase the client s inactive boot segment Erase the client s inactive data segment File gt tftp get 1 2 3 4 ustart29 bin ib Copy executable file USTART29 BIN from the server IP address is 1 2 3 4 to the cli ent s inactive boot segment 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 31 SECTION5 Software Download Command File gt tftp get 1 2 3 4 falcon d 29k id File gt fb ib id File gt fd File gt exit gt reboot File gt fd Description Copy self extracting data file FALCON_D 29K from the server to the client s inactive data seg ment Make the client s inactive boot and data segments the active seg ments Display the FLASH file directory to verify that the boot and data segments are the active segments Exit the File Menu and return to the Main Menu Run the new FLASH file by re starting the access point Note that when you reboot the access point client the Telnet connection is lost Wait about 30 seconds for the unit to start up again before trying to establish another Telnet connection Display the FLASH file directory to verify that the correct files are in the active segment 4 Repeat the above commands for each access point client that needs a new version of FLASH 5 After you have upgraded all access point clients stop the TFTP server process in the
142. ecommended A discussion of ARP server starts on page 4 36 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 81 SECTION 4 Configuration OWL IP Menu OWL IP configuration menu options are Mode Li sten IP Addresses TX Filter In summary The Mode value specifies the operation of the access point when the OWL IP port is enabled This value determines whether the access point is configured to serve as the originator or termination of a tunnel The IP Addresses table in the menus provides the super root with the information necessary to establish communications with designated bridges on remote subnets The TX Filter configuration menu specifies the frame types that are forwarded through OWL IP tunnels Mode The OWL IP port may be configured with the following options Listen Originate if Root Setting Description Listen default Access points can serve as the termination of atunnel if they arethe designated bridge for the subnet but cannot originate a tunnel Originate if Root Access points originate tunnels if they are functioning as super root for the network 4 82 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration IP Addresses The configuration screen for IP Addresses is T Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast Uni cast iD gt e u cc c cc c c c cc cc c c c c oj cc c c c c c c o cc cc c c c co opm 1 2 3 4
143. ed by any number of tabs or spaces as long as the total line length is fewer than 80 characters The script files can contain comments designated by the character All characters on a line after a are ignored Program FHDR29K EXE appends the file system header to the script file Assuming the ASCII text script file is named SCRIPT TXT the following command line appends the appropriate file header and places the output in file SCRIPT DAT 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 13 SECTION5 Software Download FHDR29K d v1 00 SCRIPT TXT SCRIPT DAT d marks the file as data instead of executable This prevents the access point from trying to execute the file v1 00 sets the file s version to 1 00 The file type and version appear in the directory information on the access point Sample ScriptFile This sample script file assumes the server IP amp address has been set either from the command line or via SNMP It also assumes the files USTART29 BIN and falcon d 29k can be accessed amp from the server using no path information Erase the inactive file segments file fe ib inactive boot segment file fe id inactive data segment Get the new files int file tftp get 1 2 4 file tftp get 1 2 4 o the inactive segments c flash ap ustart29 bin ib c flash ap falcon_d 29k id Make the inactive segments active file fb ib id Reboot so changes take effect reboot 5 14 6710 Access P
144. ed setting this variable interrupts the processing at its current location halting the software download process This can leave the access point in an unknown state It is your responsibility to determine this state and take any corrective action necessary If the NextPowerU pTime variable is counting down setting this variable stops the timer halting the reboot process 5 20 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION5 Software Download SetActivePointers Use SetActivePointers to make inactive access point segments active but only immediately before rebooting The variable s format is File sdvars set setactivepointers none boot data both The default valueis none Setting the value to boot or data affects only the given segment Setting the value to both changes both segments When the NextPowerU pTime variable counts down to zero this field is checked to see if any inactive segments should be made active This value resets to its default of none whenever the access point reboots NextPowerUpTime NextPowerU pTime is a relative time at which to reboot the access point The variable s format is File sdvars set nextpoweruptime lt dd hh mm ss The value of this variable is how long into the future the access point should reboot itself If you do not want to reboot the access point after setting this variable you can set this variable to zero As long as the NextPowerU pTime variable has not cou
145. ed separately for unicast single physical address and multicast group address frame types Many network protocols use multicast messages for establishing and maintaining connections and use unicast messages for data exchange 4 28 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Inbound options are Multicast Pri mary Uni cast Di sabled Multicast and Unicast options have the following settings Enabl ed Pri mary Di sabl ed Setting Description Enabled Access point floods to all ports similar toa conventional bridge Primary Frames are flooded inbound only This Multicast default setting is useful in many wireless installa tions where the super root servers or gateways for wireless stations are on the same Ethernet segment Disabled Frames are not flooded Usethis setting Unicast default only if the Outbound to Secondaries option is also set to Disabled Outbound to Secondaries Outbound to Secondaries floods frames with unknown destinations to secondary LAN segments Settings are Enabl ed Registered Disabled 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 29 SECTION 4 Configuration Setting Description Enabled All designated bridges flood to secondary LANs This setting allows the super root to control flooding for all access points serving as designated bridges for secondary LANs see page 4 57 Registered Designated bridges flood according to their individual flood regist
146. ed to be authorized for access to the con figuration menus you unexpectedly receive a request for user name and password it s possible that another user is currently attempting to view or modify the configuration via telnet or the serial port An attempt to start another HTTP session from another computer will be refused until this session has been logged out How to use the Configuration Menu Select Review write changes to see the existing changes from the defaults Optionally select an Undo option to remove changes Locate and change configuration items by navigating in the Configuration Menu Select the Submit Changes button to submit the changes on each form Repeat the above steps until all changes have been submitted Select Review write changes and review the changes you have made Select Commit to write the changes Note Some early browser versions can t be convinced by the server to always get a fresh copy of a document that was previously fetched This might cause old and misleading information to be displayed Updating the browser pressing the reload button or disabling the browser s cache may be hel pf ul Copyright e 1996 1997 Norand Corporation All rights reserved 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 91 SECTION 4 Configuration Configuration Guidelines Planning Your Installation To plan your installation refer to Finding the Best Location in Section 3 for installation guidelines Using
147. ed to operate with more than the maximum number of wireless stations in any one access point coverage area Reusing the Frequency f access points are separated by sufficient distance you can reuse a frequency as illustrated in Figure D 2 6710 Access PointUser s Guide D 7 APPENDIXD S UHF Specifications and Antennas NOTE A site survey is required for this type of installation D 105dBm i Access PointA ix Access Point B FigureD 2 Frequency Reuse In this type of installation you can install access points on the same frequency Each access point can sustain the single frequency wireless station population and transaction rate The guideline for frequency reuse is The signal level produced by access point A must be less than 105 dBm at the required coverage limit of access point B Increasing System Throughput To increase the wireless station population or system transaction rate you can overlap access point coverage areas and use multiple frequencies The system design allows up to four frequencies 100 stations and three transactions per second Large wireless station populations or transaction rates require use of one of the high speed RF media D 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXD S UHF Specifications and Antennas Two configuration options are possible Option 1 Configure wireless stations for frequency agile operation Option 2 Configure wireless stations f
148. ed value ei criticalErrors 2 ceReset OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON A user can reset the critical error log by setting ceReset to true 1 Valid values are true 1 or false 2 criticalErrors 3 ceLogTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF CELogEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI O Critical Error Log Table criticalErrors 4 ceLogEntry OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX CELogEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX ceLogErrorCode ceLogTable 1 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 31 APPENDIXG MIB CELogEntry SEQUENCE ceLogErrorCode INTEGER ceLogErrorCount Counter ceLogErrorCode OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Critical error code A 16 bit value which uniquely indentifies a system software error The error codes are intended for internal Norand use ceLogEntry 1 ceLogErrorCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Error count for the associated celLogErrorCode celogEntry 2 ni nterfaces OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER norandNET 2 ni f x OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER ninterfaces 2 The Norand Extended Interfaces Table nifxTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF NIFXEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Norand Extended Interface Table cee onbfx 4 nifxEntry 0BJ ECT TYPE
149. edar Rapids IA 52401 INTERMEC NORAND PEN KEY and TRAKKER areregistered trademarks and ANTARES and J ANUS are trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation 1996 Intermec Technologies Corporation All rights reserved This publication printed on recycled paper Acknowledgments Portions of this product contain software which is licensed from and is copyrighted by Epilogue Technology Corporation 1988 1995 all rights reserved DECn and VT are registered trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation Hewlett Packard and HP are registered trademarks and HP OpenView is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Novel and NetWareare registered trademarks and IPX and SPX are trademarks of Novell Inc PC AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation PROCOMM and PROCOMM PLUS areregistered trademarks of DataStorm Technologies Inc Proxim and RangeLAN are trademarks of Proxim Inc NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE FCC Computer Compliance This equipment meets Class B digital device limits per Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits protect against interference in a residential area It emits uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If you do not install and use the equipment according to its instructions it may i
150. en the designated bridge and the super root for inbound frames The encapsulation uses the standard IP GRE protocol Outbound Data frames are forwarded outbound through an IP tunnel if A wireless station is known to be attached to an access point on a particular remote subnet The frame type is specified in the TX Filter menu Designated bridges are responsible for forwarding attach status for wireless stations to the super root The super root maintains entries for these stations in its forwarding database indicating the correct subnet for outbound forwarding IP ARP Address Resolution Protocol and ICMP frames are normally forwarded outbound through all tunnels Enabling the ARP server in the super root can reduce the number of ARPs forwarded Inbound The same forwarding rules apply for frames inbound from remote subnets Designated bridges maintain entries in their forwarding database for addresses that require routing through tunnels Frames destined for servers or stations on the local subnet are not forwarded through tunnels Only frame types configured in the TX Filter menu are forwarded 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 11 APPENDIXE OWL P Additionally IP frames are only forwarded inbound if the IP address belongs to the home subnet see Subnet Filtering page E 6 Station Mobility As stations move through a facility they roam between access point coverage areas In large installations these
151. equency The Frequency option displays a list of frequencies programmed at the factory Some radios have multiple frequencies For example 466170000 Hz 530000000 Hz The default frequency is the first frequency programmed into the list Due to regulatory constraints in most countries frequencies can only be programmed by the factory or service centers equipped to make this change Master Mode Access points with the S UHF option installed can operate with Master Mode enabled or disabled Master Mode may improve performance in some environments It should only be enabled if the access point radio coverage area does not overlap other access points operating on the same frequency If Master mode is disabled this restriction does not apply An access point operating with Master Mode disabled may overlap coverage areas with access points on the same or different frequencies Master Mode settings are Enabl ed Di sabl ed 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 77 SECTION 4 Configuration Setting Description Enabled The access point controls channel access for stations in its coverage area Disabled Access point and stations coordinate channel default access Attach Priority If the access point is operating with Master Mode disabled the attach priority of the access point can be specified Stations in the coverage area of two access points with different attach priorities normally attach to the higher priority access poin
152. equirements outlined in the platform s user guide 3 6 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION3 Installation Finding the Best Location Site Survey Intermec strongly recommends that Intermec or certified providers conduct a site survey to determine the ideal locations for all of your network components A proper site survey requires special equipment and training A site survey provides an installation recommendation that addresses various factors which can affect the performance of your wireless LAN system General Installation Guidelines Coverage in most sites requires a network of access points to beinstalled Radio coverage varies greatly with factors such as building construction number and type of obstructions in the signal path and the RF media in use Additional factors related to the intended use of the system also dictate installation practices The following general practices should be followed in any installation Locate access points centrally within areas requiring coverage Try to position the access point so its indicator lights are visible The lights are useful for troubleshooting the installation Position antennas below roof trusses and away from beams racks or other structures and obstructions Overlap access point coverage areas to avoid coverage holes Install wired LAN cabling within node limit and cable length limitations 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 3 7 SECTION3 Installation Ens
153. er may be configured to grant an infinite lease to the access point A Bootp grant is always treated as an infinite lease The access point stores the IP address subnet mask and default router in the EEPROM configuration register and disables DHCP These settings are maintained if the access point is powered off or rebooted through the ROM command monitor To restore DHCP dient operation reconfigure the IP address to 0 0 0 0 6710 Access Point User s Guide 4 21 SECTION4 Configuration NOTE DHCP is documented in RFCs 1533 1534 and 1541 Bootp is documented in RFC 951 Auto ARP Minutes The access point periodically sends an unsolicited ARP response so routers can update their routing tables The response enables a network management platform to learn about the access point on the network by querying routers Auto ARP Minutes is the number of minutes between periodic ARP requests The prompt is Range is 0 120 The default is 5 minutes A setting of O disables Auto ARP Minutes If the default router s address is 0 the ARP request is sent to the IP address of this access point Without the Auto ARP Minutes option an access point might not use its IP address for extended periods of time and expire from the router s ARP table Auto ARP Minutes enhances the discovery of the network architecture by network management tools such as OpenView by Hewlett Packard The network management tool queries IP router ARP tables to l
154. er s Guide 1 3 SECTION1 Preface System Management Publications NORAND Open Wireless LAN with HP OpenView for Windows User s Guide 961 051 009 This guide describes how to install and use the OpenView for Windows network management platform by Hewlett Packard HP OWLView for HP OpenView for UNIX User s Guide 961 051 011 This guide describes how to install and use the OWLView for HP OpenView for UNIX network management platform OWLView for HP OpenView for Windows User s Guide 961 051 010 This guide describes how to install and use the OWLView for HP OpenView for Windows network management platform Customer Support The goal of Intermec Technologies Corporation is 100 percent customer satisfaction If you would like more information about the access point or other open wireless LAN system components contact us through the Customer Response Center In North America call 800 221 9236 or 319 369 3533 1 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide Section 2 Features and Functional Overview This section describes the 6710 Access Point and how it operates on the open wireless LAN This section also describes access point components Description The 6710 Access Point provides transparent wireless communications between a wired Ethernet LAN and wireless stations Figure 2 1 shows current designs information in this user s guide applies to both designs Figure 2 1 6710 Access Points 6710 Access Poi
155. er settings This set ting allows individual designated bridges to be configured separately Disabled Flooding is disabled in all designated Multicast and bridges This setting allows the super root to Unicast default control flooding for all access points serving as designated bridges for secondary LANs see page 4 57 This setting should be used only if Inbound flooding is Disabled Outbound to Stations Outbound to Stations applies only to access points with the WLIF radio option Settings are Enabled Disabled Setting Description Enabled Frames are flooded Disabled Frames are not flooded Multicast and Unicast default 4 30 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION4 Configuration Flooding Level Checklist You can usethe following list of questions to determine the required flooding levels for the Inbound and Outbound to Secondaries options The list is structured so that you should skip later questions as soon as you determine the appropriate flood level settings If your answer is do not know go to the next question If you cannot determine the appropriate flooding levels use the higher multicast flooding levels If extensive flooding is enabled it will be more important to set Ethernet filters to reduce unnecessary traffic in the radio network In general the need for filters increases with the amount of traffic on the distribution LAN and the flooding levels Filtering starts on page 4
156. er un t l phone autre qu un appareil t l phonique sans fil pendant un orage lectrique pourrait y avoir un faible risque d lectrocution par la foudre Ne pas utiliser le t l phone afin de signaler une fuite de gaz a proximit de la fuite B CAUTION Intermec Technologies Corporation suggests you buy cables from us to connect with other devices Our cables are safe meet FCC rules and suit our products Other cables may not be tested They may cause problems from electrostatic discharge or induced energy Our warranties do not cover loss injury or damage from other cables CONTENTS SECTION 1 Preface acna oes sea aca e ae 2 7 CIC ECCE a CR E 8L CR AC 1 1 Purpose of This Guide 0c eee eee eee 1 1 OFQANIZALION tisa aeaa E wei ata eens a 1 1 Intended Audience 0 eee eee eee 1 3 Related Publications 0 1 3 Wireless Station User s Guides 1 3 System Management Publications 1 4 Customer Support 2 a i ia eee 1 4 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview sees 2 1 Description 2 5o a cR D S R E epe EMOELIMS 2 1 Bridging Functionality ssssssssseeesleeee 2 2 General Concepts ccc cece eee 2 2 Access Point Bridging Layer ssee 2 4 Network Organization ssseeese 2 4 Forwarding essere Peel RE Ud T 2 5 Pending Messages ssssssseeeeese 2 5 Flooding Configur
157. erial Number Read only Lan ID 0 Root Root Priority 1 Global Radio UHF Rfp Threshold Set Globally Disabled Value 70 UHF Frag Size Set Globally Disabled Value 250 Falc Frag Size Set Globally Disabled Value 250 Awake Time Set Globally Disabled Value 0 Global Flooding Inbound Multicast Primary Unicast Disabled Outbound to Secondaries Multicast Disabled Unicast Disabled Outbound to Stations Multicast Disabled Unicast Disabled 4 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide Option SECTION 4 Configuration Default Site Setting Ports Ethernet port Name MAC Address Status Hello Period Ethernet OWL Frame Type Cable Type Static Addresses Normal RX Filter F rame Types Action Scope SubTypes 1 Action SubType Scope SubTypes 2 Action SubType Scope Advanced RX Filter Expressions ExprSeq Offset Op Value Id Action Values Value Bridging Bridge Priority Status Flood Register omde Unique number Enabled 2 seconds DIX Auto Detect 00 00 00 00 00 00 Pass Unlisted Pass Various Various Pass DIX IP TCP Port 00 00 Enabled Disabled 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 9 SECTION4 Configuration Option Default Site Setting WLIF radio port Name omdpxma MAC Address Unique number Status Enabled Hello Period 2 seconds WLIF Security Id NORANDOWL Node Type Master Master Parms Channel 1 Subchannel 1 Wireless Hops Disabled MAC Config Default Manual MA
158. es are transmitted twice the amount of wireless traffic over the radio network doubles In general the throughput of a wireless access point has about half the effective bandwidth of a wired bridge because all frames received on the radio channel must be forwarded on the same channel Therefore using a wireless access point exchanges performance for ease of installation Wireless Stations Wirdess stations is an inclusive term that refers to network terminals and wireless computers equipped with wireless NICs Network terminals indude the INTERMEC RT 1100 Radio Terminal RT 1700 Radio Terminal and RT5900 Radio Terminal and the TRAKKER ANTARES products Wireless computers include the INTERMEC J ANUS PEN KEY 6400 Computer and PEN KEY 6550 Computer Glossary 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide SYMBOLS command 4 14 NUMBERS 10BASE T UTP Ethernet connecting to 3 16 menu option 4 42 network component 3 3 port description 2 18 1OBASE 2 thin Ethernet connecting to 3 11 3 12 menu option 4 42 network components 3 3 port description 2 18 1OBASE5 thick Ethernet connecting to 3 13 menu option 4 42 network components 3 4 port description 2 18 2 4 GHz radio SeeWLIF radio 6710MIB MIB G 1 G 2 802 1d E 4 802 2 4 44 4 50 4 51 802 2 IPX Sockets Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 802 2 IPX RIP Ethernet filter 4 46 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 E 18 802 2 IPX SAP Ether
159. es forwarded inbound E 12 hello messages E 10 home subnet E 4 E 6 limitations E 2 router 4 16 4 18 4 22 subnet mask 4 16 4 17 Telnet session 4 7 IP frame type 4 16 4 19 IP MIB family G 3 IP Mobility Support E 12 IP router SeeRouters IP subnet mask See Subnet mask IP subnets 4 79 E 12 Glossa ry 5 IP tunnels SeeOWL IP IP wireless stations Glossary 5 See also Wireless stations IPv6 E 5 IPX 4 44 ISO 2 3 J J apan WLIF radio B 2 L LAN See also Secondary LANs definition Glossary 5 ID 4 23 4 87 sample 2 15 LE operator 4 54 Leases 4 20 4 21 4 81 LEDs 2 17 6 1 Length A 2 License 4 77 D 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide INDEX Lightning suppressor and brack et B 6 Lightning suppressor capsule Line of sight B 1 C 1 D 1 LINK indicator light 6 2 Linking networks See Desig nated bridges Wireless hops Listen 4 82 LLC 4 45 LMR400 cable B 6 LMR400 cable prep tool B 6 Loading reading the previous configuration 4 14 Local session 4 2 4 3 Locating the access point 3 7 Locking bracket 2 19 Logical Link Control 4 45 Low priority 4 78 LT operator 4 54 M MAC addresses Ethernet 4 83 Ethernet port 4 38 4 39 overview 2 3 radio port 4 38 4 39 MAC config 4 60 4 68 MAC sublayer 2 3 Glossary 5 Main Menu 4 12 Main Options Menu 4 14 Manual 4 68 4 69 Manual MAC Parms 4 60 4 69 Mask 4 53 4 54 Master mode S UHF radio 4 76
160. es must receive broadcast ARP frames Comments The destination of a multicast frame is never known The Disabled setting should be used for any network where stations do not need to receive multicast frames The Disabled setting can be used for secondary LANs that only need to receive ARP frames When WLIF wireless stations must receive multicast frames set Outbound to Stations to Enabled 4 32 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration 5 Donodesin the radio network communicate with other nodes in the radio network Answer Settings Yes Inbound U nicast E nabl ed Inbound M ulticast E nabled No Inbound U nicast P rimary Inbound M ulticast Primary Outbound to Secondaries U nicast Registered Outbound to Secondaries M ulticast Registered Comments The Enabled settings facilitate peer to peer applications where nodes in the open wireless LAN communicate with each other In general the Primary and Registered settings are designed for dient or terminal applications where nodes in the open wireless LAN communicate with server nodes on the distribution LAN 6 Doradio equipped wireless station nodes open or non wireless LAN need to receive multicast or broadcast frames Answer Setting Yes Outbound to Stations M ulticast E nabled 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 33 SECTION 4 NOTE Configuration Does the radio network contain WLIF nodes that do not periodically generate traffic Answer Settin
161. ess stations None Is not allowed Has no inherent limita tions Requires home and foreign agents located on each network or subnet work APPENDIXE OWL P OWL IP Allows use of existing IP software stacks in wireless stations Requires that IP station addresses belong to the home subnet Is configurable through TX Filter Limitations are detailed under OWL IP Restrictions page E 2 Limits tunnel origination to eight IP addresses The number of remote subnets supported may be more than or fewer than eight depend ing on the selected address ing approach Is a standard feature in open wireless LAN system soft ware OWL IP Configuration Examples Example 1 Class C IP Addresses The sample network in Figure E 3 illustrates OWL IP setup for a location with several Class C IP addresses Subnet addressing is not used For illustrative purposes IP addresses have been selected from those allocated for private networks that are not connected to the Internet 6710 Access Point User s Guide E 13 APPENDIXE OWL P AP1 Super Root 192 168 15 101 Server for IP Stations 192 168 15 17 AP 3 192 168 17 188 192 168 15 1 Home Subnet AP2 4 192 168 15 36 AP4 4 Designated Bridge 192 168 17 16 1 Server for NNL Stations 192 168 23 1 AP 5 Designated Bridge 192 168 23 21 IP Station
162. et locks the access point into the bracket This bracket is recommended for installations where vibration shaking or other movement can dislodge the access point from its mount Item Part Number Mounting kit 203 386 001 6710 Access Point User s Guide 2 19 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview 2 20 6710 Access Point User s Guide Section 3 Installation This section describes how to Check the access point s default configuration Prepare for the installation Collect the networking equipment you need Find the best location Connect to the Ethernet medium Install PC cards Apply power Checking the Default Configuration The access point is shipped with default settings for system software parameters which are listed in Section 4 Configuration You may need to change some default settings to achieve a more efficient configuration for your site See Section 4 for information about reconfiguring the access point The access point should be properly configured before it is connected to the network 6710 Access Point User s Guide 3 1 SECTION3 Installation Preparing for the Installation NOTE Someone who knows and understands all applicable local building codes and is proficient with the tools and equipment used to install FCC Class B electromechanical devices should physically install the access point Before you install the access point unpack it and inspect it for damage or missing p
163. et ports minimizing involvement of other functions when unnecessary frames are received n most installations the predefined filters are used The default access point configuration sets no filters Filter setup is discussed in more detail in Section 4 Configuration Filtering and flooding control described on page 2 6 are complimentary but have different functions Filters allow frames to be eliminated based upon content of the frame usually the network protocol header fields within the frame For example filters can be set to eliminate some or all IP traffic or Novell IPX traffic 2 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Filtering occurs regardless of whether the destination address is in the forwarding database Using filters can improve the performance of the access point and prevent undesired frames from being forwarded to wireless stations attached to the access point Flooding decisions are made after frames have been received on a port and filtered Flooding settings determine how the access point forwards frames to destination addresses not in the forwarding database Radio Ports Each of the two radio ports in the access point are a connection into a LAN segment consisting of all wireless stations and access points that use the same wireless technology are within wireless communications range of the access point and are configured to communicate together Thetwo PC card s
164. fatermec Technologies Corporation 6710 Access Point USER S GUIDE P N 961 047 081 Revision C ision J uly 1998 NOTICE This publication contains information proprietary to Intermec Technologies Corpo ration It is being supplied to you with the express understanding that the infor mation contained herein is for the benefit of the contracting party only and may not be copied distributed or displayed to third parties without the express writ ten consent of Intermec Technologies Corporation and shall be returned to Inter mec Technologies Corporation upon written request If a purchase license or nondisclosure agreement has been executed the terms of that agreement shall govern this document This publication is furnished for information only and the information in it is subject to change without notice Although every effort has been made to provide complete and accurate information ntermec Technologies Corporation assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document We welcome your comments concerning this publication Although every effort has been made to keep it free of errors some may occur When reporting a specific problem please describe it briefly and include the book title and part number as well as the paragraph or figure number and the page number Send your comments to Intermec Technologies Corporation Publications Department 550 Second Street SE C
165. for normal operation Interference Optimizes the settings for the radio protocol for better performance in environments with high interference or multipath Throughput Optimizes the settings for the radio protocol for better performance of file transfer operations in open or uncongested environments such as of fice areas Manual Allows you to adjust WLIF MAC parameters located under Manual MAC Parms individu ally Do not select this setting unless a Systems Engineer directs you to do so Manual MAC Parms Adjusting the settings for Manual MAC Parms is not advised unless instructed by Technical S upport Occasionally a sites WLIF radio parameters may need to be fine tuned Options for Manual MAC Parms enable the Customer Response Center to fine tune this access point s performance Settings are Hop Period lt 200ms gt Beacon Frequency 2 Deferral Slot Default Fairness Slot Default Fragment Size 310 Transmit Mode AUTO Norm Ack Retry 255 Frag Ack Retry 255 Norm QFSK Retry 255 Frag QFSK Retry 255 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 69 SECTION 4 Configuration Hop Period Hop Period sets the hopping time period which determines how long the radio stays on a frequency in the hopping sequence before stepping to the next frequency Settings are The default is 200 ms A longer period results in better throughput A shorter period results in faster roaming response and better immunity from
166. g Yes Inbound Unicast Primary Outbound to Secondaries U nicast Registered or Inbound U nicast E nabled Support communications with a distribution LAN Supports general peer to peer communications WLIF nodes using NORAND terminal emulation periodically generate traffic and do not require flooding Comments You may need to enable unicast flooding if the radio network contains WLIF terminal nodes or nodes on a secondary Ethernet LAN that do not periodically generate traffic Occasional traffic is needed to maintain information in the forwarding database You can also do the following Use the Outbound to Secondaries U nicast Enabled setting to force unicast flooding to WLI F nodes Use the nbound Unicast Primary or Outbound to Secondaries U nicast Registered setting in combination with the Flood Register U nicast setting for selected secondary Ethernet LANs These settings avoid network wide universal flooding if nodes that do not periodically generate traffic are restricted to those secondary Ethernet LANs 4 34 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration 8 Doestheradio network contain a secondary Ethernet LAN s with connected nodes that do not periodically generate traffic Answer Setting Yes Outbound to Secondaries U nicast E nabl ed Alternatively you can configure permanent addresses in the Static Address Table page 4 42 9 Doesthe radio network contain a secondary Ethernet LAN s
167. g information about the PC card file system is returned 5 26 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION5 Software Download Names of all files on the card Type of file executable data text Size in bytes of each file Date of each file Version number of each file in the format Vxx xx FPE FPE erases the entire contents of a PC card installed in PC card slot NIC2 on the access point Individual files cannot beddeded When you issue the FPE command each location on a PC card installed in slot NIC2 is overwritten with O s FPX FPX performs a Y modem batch protocol download of a file into an SRAM card installed in slot NIC2 on the access point The downloaded file appends to any existing files on the PC card PN PN turns off Power U p Quiet mode PQ PQ PQ turns on Power U p Quiet mode When you configure the access point to boot in quiet mode it does not display ROM power up messages while it boots More importantly it does not allow a single received character to invoke the ROM command monitor and prevent the access point from booting when a host is connected to it and trying to communicate After you issue the PQ command every ROM power up message is done in quiet mode When you turn on quiet mode you cannot access the ROM command monitor by pressing a single keystroke during the boot sequence 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 27 SECTION5 Software Download When the ROM command monitor is in quiet
168. guidelines for LAN ID and controller setup Root Root options apply to access points configured to operate as the super root They should be set to the same settings in all access points with a nonzero root priority configured Options are Root Priority Global Radio Global Floodi ng Root Priority Root Priority determines which access points are candidates to become the super root node on the distribution LAN also called primary LAN The prompt is Range is 0 7 The default is 1 Super Root Candidates Access points assigned a root priority between 1 and 7 are candidates to become the super root Access points assigned a root priority of O are prohibited from becoming the super root 4 24 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION4 Configuration Super Root Selection The access point with the highest assigned root priority becomes the super root whenever it is powered on and active If the current super root goes offline the remaining candidates negotiate to determine which one becomes the new super root This normally takes about 1 minute The super root is always the access point with the highest root priority other than O If two or more access points have the same root priority the unit with the highest Ethernet address becomes the super root Super Root Redundancy For redundancy two or three access points should have a nonzero root priority All other access points should have a r
169. h the access point through a VT 100 terminal emulation program Most general purpose communications software such as PROCOMM PLUS supports this emulation To create a session see Figure 4 1 and the procedure following it You should carefully review the procedure first to become familiar with the process 4 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration ITIN oy Cl e 10BASE2 1iopAsET AVI AC INPUT 100 240 VAC 1 PC with terminal emulation program 2 Cable 321 355 001 for a 25 pin PC COM port or Cable 226 106 001 for a 9 pin PC COM port standard null modem cable 3 6710 Access Point DIAG port Figure 4 1 Local Session Ensure the terminal emulation program is installed on the PC With both the PC and access point powered OFF connect the communication cable to the appropriate PC COM port 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 3 SECTION 4 Configuration 3 Connect the other end of the communication cable to the DIAG port on the access point Turn the PC on 4 After the PC boots start the terminal emulation program 5 Set the terminal emulation program s options according to what you want to do Access the configuration menus or access the ROM command monitor Accessing the Configuration Menus 1 Settheterminal emulation parameters in your communications software If you are configuring this access point for the first time
170. he Hardware Parameters Group hwPartNo OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 2147483647 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The Norand part number of the hardware device e hw1 hwDescription OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 40 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The description of the hardware device e hw2 G 24 6710 Access Point User s Guide file APPENDIXG MIB hwRevision 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 0 2147483647 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The revision level of the hardware device hw 3 hwSeri al No OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 2147483647 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The serial number of the hardware device hw4 hwi D OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 0 2147483647 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The device identifier of the hardware device Values 3250 4000 4020 4030 4033 3240 1000 1100 1700 5940 4650 100 ACE process 200 DOSNMS 300 Norand Proxy Agent 6710 Access Point hw 5 OBJECT IDENTIFIER nSystem 3 fsinfo OBJECT IDENTIFIER file 1 The FileSystem Information Table fsEnabled OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE if the file system is enabled fsinfo 1 fsMaxSectors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory
171. he command s format is File fe segment segment is a segment number a segment name or the word all Specifying all erases all FLASH file segments but does not erase the RAM segment EXAMPLE 1 This command erases FLASH segment 1 File gt fe 1 EXAMPLE 2 This command erases the inactive boot segment File gt fe ib TFTP Command Use the Tftp command to display the following screen Argument Description Get Get lt host IP addr gt lt foreign File gt lt local File gt Put Put host IP addr foreign File local File Server Start Stop Query TFTP Server Display this help An access point client can obtain files from a TFTP server The server may be one access point configured to act as the server or another device on the network The server must operate in octet 8 bit mode 5 8 6710 Access PointUser s Guide NOTE SECTION5 Software Download As a server the access point can service read and write requests from an access point dient To operate as a TFTP server the access point must be loaded with these software versions ROM version 1 13 or greater FLASH USTART29 BIN version 1 23 or greater As a dient the access point can read files from and write files to any TFTP server on the network The dient always requests octet mode In general TFTP dient sessions should fail only if the server is not responding because it is busy serving other clients or because it has
172. he facility For nonuniform sites the location needs to be adjusted for best coverage For small sites location is less critical and may be adjusted to minimize LAN wiring Location of S UHF access points within computer rooms is not recommended because RF emissions from the higher Speed processors used in current generation computers may reduce system range Installing Multiple Access Points Multiple access points can extend coverage reuse a frequency and increase system throughput Extending Coverage Multiple access points may be installed to extend coverage Figure D 1 shows an installation where maximizing coverage is the main objective NOTE A site survey is required for this type of installation D 6 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXD S UHF Specifications and Antennas FigureD 1 Extending Coverage In this type of installation the access point coverage areas are overlapped minimally to provide seamless coverage The access points may all use a common frequency requiring adherence to the system terminal population and transaction rate limits for one frequency You can also install access points on different frequencies In this case you may be ableto increase the wireless station population and transaction rate However the single frequency wireless station population and transaction rate must be maintained per access point The installation must consider whether the system may at any time be requir
173. he following Wireless stations using IP A secondary LAN containing IP and IPX hosts linked by access points AP 2 and 4 An IPX router connecting to another Novell network DI X and 802 3 SNAP frames NOTE Many networks use only one Ethernet frame type DIX is the most common type Set filters only for the Ethernet frame types found on your network 4 48 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration AP1 4 Super Root Distribution LAN IPX Router IP Wireless Stations IPX Host Secondary LAN Figure 4 3 Access Points Servicing IP Wireless Stations Example 1 Access points 1 3 5 and 6 in Figure 4 3 service only IP wireless stations n these access points it is desirable to pass necessary IP traffic but eliminate unnecessary IP X traffic These do not need to be forwarded to the secondary LAN Inthis caseit is not necessary to usethe SubTypes 1 or SubTypes 2 configuration 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 49 SECTION 4 Configuration In example 1 Frame Types is set as follows Action Scope DI X I P TCP Ports Pass AI DI X I P UDP Ports Pass lt All gt DIX 1P Other Protocols lt Pass gt lt All gt DI X I PX Sockets Drop A DIX Other EtherTypes lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt SNAP IP TCP Ports Pass AMI SNAP IP UDP Ports Pass lt All gt SNAP 1P Other Protoc
174. hese stations The Wireless LAN Interoperability Forum WLIF 2 4 GHz option also provides a reliable attach mechanism for stations using the NORAND Network Layer NNL terminal emulation network protocol Multicast flooding levels are set for individual networks based on the needs of wireless stations to receive multicast frames For networks with IP wireless stations only the Proxy ARP Server provides an option to enabling multicast flooding 2 6 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Proxy ARP Server The Proxy ARP Server is an advanced flooding control capability for stations using IP An ARP Address Resolution Protocol is a type of multicast message used to determine the physical MAC address of a station using a specific P address When Proxy ARP is enabled the IP addresses of stations using IP are included in the forwarding database If the destination IP address matches an entry in the forwarding database the ARP is sent to the physical unicast address matching that IP address To allow customization of this capability to optimize performance the server operates in one of the following modes No flooding Delayed flooding Normal flooding Proxy ARP Server is discussed in more detail in Section 4 Configuration Bridge Ports The access point has the following physical ports An Ethernet port Two PC card slots capable of accepting a variety of wireless Network Inte
175. ia and most countries in North and South America Contact a Sales Representative for current information about countries in which the product is approved for use and countries in which submission for type approval is planned Part Numbers The following chart lists radio part numbers Part Number Comments 245 149 102 Kit used with 219 006 001 or 219 007 001 219 006 001 RM111 only Used with 245 149 102 PC card slot 2 only Band is 450 to 470 MHz Multiple frequencies must be separated by at least 40 KHz 20 KHz spacing or 50 KHz 25 KHz spacings 219 007 001 low band RM111 only Must be used with PC card slot 2 only 245 149 002 Band is 430 to 450 MHz Multiple frequencies must be separated by at least 40 KHz D 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXD S UHF Specifications and Antennas Wireless Hops Because of the low data rate wireless hops are not supported for S UHF systems Antenna Connector The S UHF antenna uses a standard BNC connector Whip Antennas For S UHF the standard whip antenna is the primary antenna Its part number is 805 511 001 A cabled external antenna is required in cases where the access point and antenna cannot be installed at the same location Antennas should be installed to maximize separation distance from metal obstructions The recommended minimum separation distance is 19 feet 6 meters The following chart lists cabled external whip antennas Length Part N
176. iceld INTEGER read 2 1 6 addrl pAddress IPAddress read Table G 20 brgState GROUP Bridge State Information norand manage norandN et nBridge brgState x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 17 6 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 3 bsAddress PhysAddress read 4 bsL anld INTEGER read 5 bsCostToR oot INTEGER read 6 bsl sRoot INTEGER read 7 bsl sAttached INTEGER read 8 bsAttachl d INTEGER read 9 bsM yRooctPriority INTEGER read 10 bsRootPort INTEGER read G 20 6710 Access Point User s Guide OID 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 APPENDIXG MIB Table G 20 Conti nued brgState GROUP Bridge State I nformation norand manage norandN et nBridge brgState x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 17 6 x Object Name Object Type Access bsDesignatedRootA ddress PhysAddress read bsDesignatedRootPriority INTEGER read bsDesignatedRootSequence INTEGER read bsParentAddress PhysAddress read bsPortCount INTEGER read bsN odel d INTEGER read bsRootChangedCount Counter read bsRootCount Counter read bsAttachCount Counter read bsDetachReason INTEGER read bsN etworkTime bsU niF loodL evel bsM ultiF loodL evel bsl sPrimaryBridge bsl sSecondaryBridge bsU niF ilterE xpr bsM ultiF ilterE xpr TimeTicks read INTEGER read INTEGER read INTEGER read INTEGER read INTEGER read INTEGER read 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 21 APPENDIXG M B Table G 21 bridgeStats GROUP Bridge Statistics norand manage
177. identifies the port rtEntry 2 APPENDIX G MIB 0BJ ECT TYPE ible tion Definition hysAddress TEGER TEGER TEGER TEGER i meTi cks ysAddress TEGER TEGER ysAddress TEGER TEGER TEGER NTEGER TEGER TEGER TEGER TEGER P T P Ph OB ECT TYPE the destination OBJECT TYPE 4 1 4 A number which uniquely 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 57 APPENDIX G M B rtAge OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The time in minutes since the route was updated sim rtEntry 3 rtNodeld OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 16 bit node ID of the destination A 16 bit identifier which uniquely identifies an OWL node in an OWL LAN rtEntry 4 rtAttachld 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Attach sequence number The sequence number is copied from an OWL ATTACH request PDU The sequence number is not valid for remote nodes rtEntry 5 rtAttachTi me 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Ti meTi cks ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Last attach time 01 secs rtEntry 6 rtApEaddr OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 802 address of AP which is the first hop on the path to
178. idg ing frames destined for or received from the secondary LAN providing a wireless connection between two uncon nected secondary LAN segments DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is an Internet standard stack protocol that allows dynamic distribution of IP address and other configuration information to IP hosts on a network Glossary 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide GLOSSARY Implementation of the DHCP client simplifies installation because the devices automatically receive P addresses from a DHCP server on the network The DHCP client also ac cepts addresses from a Bootp server Direct Sequence Direct sequenceis a spread spectrum technique by which the transmitted signal is spread over a wide frequency range In a direct sequence system the bandwidth is large relative to the data rate Distribution Primary LAN Ethernet FLASH Forwarding A distribution LAN is the Ethernet segment to which the super root directly connects Typically it is also the seg ment to which the primary hosts or LAN servers connect In this user s guide Ethern amp is a general term indicating both 802 3 and DI X Ethernet also called Ethernet 2 0 FLASH is a special type of EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only M emory that can be erased and reprogrammed A frame is forwarded by sending it to the next hop on the path to the final destination All access points including wireless access points forw
179. igure 3 1 T Connector 0c 3 3 Figure 3 2 Cable Terminator 00005 3 3 Figure 3 3 Cable With RJ 45 Plugs 3 3 Figure 3 4 N Series Transceiver ssus 3 4 Figure 3 5 Vampire Tap 0c eee eee ee eee 3 5 Figure 3 6 Mounting Bracket ssss 3 9 Figure 3 7 End of LOBASE2 Segment 3 11 Figure 3 8 Middle of LOBASE2 Segment 3 12 Figure 3 9 N Series Transceiver sssuus 3 14 Figure 3 10 Vampire Tap cece ee eee 3 15 Figure 3 11 1OBASE T 0 cee eee eens 3 16 Figure 3 12 WLIF PC Card Assembly 3 17 Figure 3 13 900 MHz PC Card Assembly 3 18 Figure 3 14 S UHF PC Card Assembly 3 19 Figure 3 15 AC Power Input Connection 3 21 xii 6710 Access PointUser s Guide CONTENTS Figure 4 1 Local Session sssesssseeese 4 3 Figure 4 2 Telnet Session sssesseses 4 6 Figure 4 3 Access Points Servicing IP Wireless Statins o6 ood este eres te tud tee vs cheb aduana 4 49 Figure 4 4 Wireless Hopping Through WLIF Radios 4 65 Figure 4 5 OWL IP Overview eeeeeeeee 4 80 Figure 4 6 Web Browser Session ssslslssus 4 89 Figure 6 1 Indicator Lights ssseeuse 6 1 Figure B 1 Antenna Adapter Cable B 5 Figure D 1 Extending Coverage s
180. ile you are configuring it through the browser the session terminates You can create a new session after the access point reboots To establish a browser session see Figure 4 6 and the procedure following it 4 88 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Ethernet LAN 1 1 Platform with Web browser 2 6710 Access Point Figure 4 6 Web Browser Session 1 Ensurethe access point is connected to the Ethernet cable and has an assigned IP address 2 Ensurethe Web browser is installed on the platform Start the browser application 4 Enter the access point s IP address in the browser s Uniform Resource Locator URL field For example http 999 999 99 99 After you enter the correct IP address the Enter Network Password screen appears w Enter Network Password Please enter your authentication information Resource resource number User name resource number Password FETTET Save this password in your password list 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 89 SECTION 4 Configuration 5 Enter the user name and password Refer to the following chart for help with all fields Setting Description Resource A number assigned to this session The number changes every time you access the Enter Network Password screen User name The Resource number For exam ple if the Resource number is 3550 the user name is 35
181. in frame types are never forwarded through tunnels These include those P protocols used for coordinating routers or MAC frames used for coordinating bridges These frames are not forwarded 802 1d bridge frames IP frames with a broadcast or multicast Ethernet address IP frames with the following router protocol types and decimal values E 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P DGP 86 Dissimilar Gateway Protocol EGP 8 Exterior Gateway Protocol I DPR 35 Inter Domain Policy Routing Protocol IDRP 45 Inter Domain Routing Protocol IGP 9 Interior Gateway Protocol I GRP 88 Interior Gateway Routing Protocol MHRP 48 Mobile Host Routing Protocol OSPFIGP 89 Open Shortest Path First Interior Gateway Protocol IP ICMP types including IPv6 MobilelP Router Advertisement Router Selection P UDP frames with these destination protocol port numbers BGP 179 Border Gateway Protocol RAP 38 Route Access Protocol RIP 520 Routing I nformation Protocol P TCP frames with these destination or source protocol port numbers BGP 179 Border Gateway Protocol RAP 38 Route Access Protocol These frames are always forwarded DI X 0875C open wireless LAN inter access point coordination frames DI X 0800 Internet Protocol IP Protocol 47 GRE 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 5 APPENDIXE OWL P Default Filter Settings The default settings for TX Filter a
182. ing temperatures for the WLIF 900 MHz and S UHF radio options are listed in Appendixes B C and D respectively Physical Characteristics Approximate size 3 75 in x 6 88 in x 14 5 in LWH 9 5 cm x 17 5 cm x 36 cm Approximate weight 3 75 Ibs 1 70 kg A 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide Appendix B WLIF Specifications and Antennas RM180 The model name for the WLIF radio option is RM180 a Type lll PC card Following are networking specifications Frequency band Compatibility Range Coverage Data rate 6710 Access Point Ethernet compatibility Output power MAC protocol Wireless hop capability 2 401 to 2 480 GHz spread spectrum frequency hopping Interoperable with WLIF open air and open wireless LAN products Up to 500 feet line of sight 25 000 square feet 2 322 square meters in typical indoor installations 800 K bps or 1 6 Mbps manual or autosel ecting Requires communications driver included with the 6710 Access Point software Ethernet packet types and Ethernet addressing 100 mW RangeLAN2 Yes 6710 Access Point User s Guide B 1 APPENDIXB WLIF Specifications and Antennas Optional interbuilding Yes wireless bridge Operatingtemperature 44F to 122 7F 20 4C to 50 C Regulatory compliance FCC 15 247 Industry Canada RSS 210 European Union ETS 300 328 CE EMC EEC in Europe MKK standard in J apan Consult a Sales Representative for availability Radio Opera
183. inition segEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEGEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX seglD segTable 1 Columnar Object Definitions SEGEntry SEQUENCE segi D NTEGER segFirstSector INTEGER segLastSector INTEGER segStatus NTEGER segSize NTEGER segFree NTEGER segl D OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The segment ID 1 NUM SEGMENTS 1 A non zero number which uniquely identifies a segment segEntry 1 segFirstSector OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The first physical sector in the segment 1 MAX SECTORS 1 segEntry 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 27 APPENDIXG M B segLastSector OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The last physical sector in the segment FIRST SECTOR MAX SECTORS 1 segEntry 3 segStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER valid 1 invalid 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The segment status valid 2 invalid 22 segEntry 4 segSize OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The segment size in bytes segEntry 5 segFree OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of available bytes in the segment which are not currently allocated to a fi
184. interference Beacon Frequency The access point periodically transmits a beacon to allow Slave radios wireless stations to quickly scan each frequency to find a Master an access point Beacon Frequency is the number of hops that occur between beacons The prompt is Range is 1 7 A setting of 1 is one beacon on every hop A setting of 7 is one beacon every 7 hops The default is 2 You can reduce the scan time and therefore the time required for roaming by increasing the beacon frequency More beacons may let wireless stations synchronize faster but beacons use bandwidth otherwise available for data Deferral Slot and Fairness Slot The number of deferral and fairness slots determines the average back off time when the channel is sensed to be busy 4 70 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Settings for both options are Default 1 3 7 The default setting is Default You can dothe following Reduce the number of slots on lightly loaded networks to increase throughput Increase the number to help prevent repeated collisions under a heavy load You can set Fairness Slot as follows Increase the number to prioritize the channel access for nodes that have been waiting the longest to access the channel Decrease the number to minimize initial back off delays Fragment Size Fragment Size determines the maximum size of a fragment to be sent over this radio during interference The prompt
185. is the SubTypes 1 screen Action SubType Value NNL Pass lt DIX EtherType gt 87 5b The default settings for IP protocols enable ARP and I CMP TCP and UDP are disabled by default Applications running over TCP or UDP can be enabled by changing the DIX TCP and DI X UDP ports to pass all frames Following is the Frame Types screen Acti on Scope DI X I P TCP Ports Pass All DI X I P UDP Ports Pass All 6710 Access Point User s Guide E 17 APPENDIXE OWL P Alternatively if a limited set of known applications is to be supported filters may be set to selectively pass listed Port numbers Following is the Frame Types screen Acti on Scope DI X IP TCP Ports Drop lt Unlisted gt DIX 1P UDP Ports lt Drop gt lt Unlisted gt For example to support FTP data and control and Telnet enable protocol ports 20 21 and 23 respectively The above IP port numbers are specified as decimal values These can be input directly by following the entry with a decimal point for example 20 Values are displayed in the table as hexadecimal values 14 15 and 17 Following is the SubTypes 1 screen Action SubType Value DI X ARP Pass lt DIX EtherType gt 08 06 SNAP ARP Drop lt SNAP EtherType gt 08 06 802 2 I PX RIP Drop 802 2 IPX Socket 04 51 802 2 1 PX SAP Drop 802 2 IPX Socket 04 53 NNL Pass DI X EtherType 87 5b NETBI 0S Drop 802 2 SAP
186. k Retry 4 69 4 73 Frag QFSK Retry 4 69 4 73 Fragment size 4 69 4 71 Frame Types 4 43 4 44 Frame types 802 3 4 19 DIX 4 19 4 41 filtering 4 43 4 84 IP 4 19 menu options 4 44 OWL 4 41 SNAP 4 41 Frames definition Glossary 4 discarding 4 45 4 62 4 63 4 84 encapsulating E 2 flooding inbound 4 29 to all ports 4 29 to secondary LANs 4 29 with unknown destina tions 4 29 Index 5 INDEX Frames Continued IPX E 3 no flooding 4 29 OWL IP forwarded E 5 forwarding E 11 inbound E 11 not forwarded E 4 operation E 7 permanent filters E 4 restrictions E 4 safeguards E 3 subnet filtering E 6 Frequencies 900 MHz radio C 1 beacon 4 70 reusing D 7 S UHF radio 4 77 D 1 D 4 separation guidelines D 10 single D 7 D 8 Glossary 9 source power A 1 WLIF radio B 1 Frequency 4 76 4 77 Frequency agile D 9 Glossary 4 Frequency hopping B 1 Glossa ry 4 FS s n command 5 25 5 26 FTP E 18 FX 5 23 FX s command 5 23 G GE operator 4 54 Generic Router Encapsulation SeeGRE Get command 5 11 Global Flooding 4 24 4 28 Global flooding 4 28 Global Radio 4 24 4 25 GRE 4 79 E 2 E 5 E 11 GT operator 4 54 Guidelines configuration 4 92 flooding level checklist 4 31 general installation 3 7 Guidelines Continued S UHF frequency and separation D 10 installation D 5 transaction rates D 4 H Handshaking 4 21 Height A 2 Hello mess
187. le segEntry 6 dir OBJECT IDENTIFIER file 3 The File Directory Table Table Definition dirTable 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF DI REntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The FileSystem Directory dir 2 Row Definition G 28 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB dirEntry 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX DI REntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX dirlndex dirTable 1 Columnar Object Definitions DIREntry SEQUENCE dirlndex NTEGER di r Name DisplayString dirSegment NTEGER dirType NTEGER dirSize NTEGER dirDate DisplayString dirTi me DisplayString dirVersion DisplayString dirlndex OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Directory Index dirEntry 1 e i r Name OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 14 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON File name dirEntry 2 e irSegment OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON File segment 1 NUM SEGMENTS 1 The segment ID which identifies the segment containing the file dirEntry 3 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 29 APPENDIXG M B dirType OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER executabl e 1 data 2 invalid 3 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON File type executable data invalid dirEntry 4
188. ll rights reserved Portions copyright Epilogue Technology Corporation 1988 1995 All rights reserved P 0 0 0 0 Serial Unique 10 digit number Password NOTE A different screen appears when you create a session through a Web browser See page 4 88 for information about Web browser sessions The password screen shows the current settings for the IP address and serial number It also shows the prompt for the top level password Enter the password case insensitive to display the Main Menu The default password is CR52401 Main Menu After you enter the top level password the Main Menu appears 4 12 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Loading configuration from EEPROM Command Description File File system menu View View modify the configuration Clear Set the configuration to default values Read Read the configuration from EEPROM Write Write the configuration to EEPROM Reboot Restart using last written configuration Exit Di sconnect Display this help The menu lists the commands you can use to do various tasks described on the following pages The screen also displays the command prompt gt At the prompt type the name of the command you want to perform and press Enter Commands are case insensitive The Main Menu redisplays when you enter an invalid command The following chart describes how to use the commands Use To File List file system commands and descriptio
189. llowing chart lists kit part numbers Cable Length Kit Part Number 10 feet 203 423 010 20 feet 203 423 011 30 feet 203 423 012 B 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXB WLIF Specifications and Antennas High Gain Yagi The high gain yagi is a linear polarized antenna typically used in heavy racking where there are long corridors that cannot be penetrated through the side using collinears The following chart lists kit part numbers Cable Length Kit Part Number 10 feet 203 423 007 20 feet 203 423 008 30 feet 203 423 009 Antenna Adapter Cable The antenna adapter cable Figure B 1 enables INTERMEC Model 110 or 2100 antennas to be used with the 6710 Access Point The cable s part number is 226 295 001 ee 1 RF plug custom threaded 2 Coaxial cable 6 inches 3 N type connector Figure B 1 Antenna Adapter Cable Consult your Sales Representative for the regulatory status and availability of this part outside of North America 6710 Access PointUser s Guide B 5 APPENDIXB WLIF Specifications and Antennas Model 2100 Antennas and Cables 2 4 GHz Antennas Part Number Antenna 2 4GHz 805 486 001 066147 063363 065349 067261 067262 067263 Whip page B 3 Omni 3 dBi omni 9 dBi omni 3 dBi mini omni 5 dBi dual flat 9 dBi flat panel 2 4 GHz Antenna Cables and Connectors Part Number Description 226 295 001 064616 063245 063246 063198
190. lly designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the tele phone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines i Avoid using telephone other than cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Installation du t l phone avertissements Les avertissements qui suivent s appliquent a tout quipement qui peut tre branch aux lignes ou syst mes t l phoniques Pour votre s curit personnelle et pour prot ger l quipement de tout dommage lectrique ou physique potentiel NE PAS brancher un ordinateur tablette lectronique ou ses p riph riques aux lignes t l phoniques ou quipements avant que les avertissements suivants aient t lus compris et observ s i Ne jamais installer de c blage t l phonique pendant un orage lectrique Nejamais installer de prise t l phonique dans un endroit humide a moins que la prise ait t sp cifiquement concue pour tre utilis e dans les endroits humides Ne jamais toucher les fils de t l phone ou de l quipement terminal non isol s moins que la ligne t l phonique n ait t d branch e de l inter face r seau i User de prudence lors de l installation ou dela modification de lignes t l phoniques viter d utilis
191. lots are intended for wireless NICs and are designated as NIC1 and NIC2 Internally they are configured as Port 3 and Port 2 respectively The following wireless options are currently supported WLIF 2 4 GHz 900 MHz 450 MHz S UHF The different media options provide alternative coverage and throughput tradeoffs Radio media options are described in more detail in Appendixes B C and D The access point also supports combinations of two adapters for operation in mixed media systems or for WLIF radios a wireless access point capability The following dual radio configurations are supported WLIF and 900 MHz WLIF and S UHF WLIF and WLIF limited to Master Slave configuration for wireless access points 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 2 9 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Configuration of individual radio options and the WLI F wireless access point configuration are discussed in Section 4 Configuration OWL IP Port The OWL IP port is a logical port used in installations where the wireless infrastructure is required to operate across multiple IP subnets that is in installations where P routers are used The OWL IP port is an advanced capability that allows stations supporting IP and nonroutable protocols such as NNL used in some terminal emulation installations to roam without losing connectivity when a wireless LAN installation must extend over multiple IP subnets n some cases OWL IP may a
192. lowing pages Not shown is the mounting bracket which attaches the access point to a wall or ceiling 10 BASE 2 10BASE T AC INPUT 100 240 VAG Figure2 4 Access Point Components 2 16 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 1 2 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Protective cover The cover protects two Typell or Typelll PC card slots Figure 2 5 shows where the slots are located 1 PC card slots Figure 2 5 PC Card Slots Indicator lights Four pairs of indicator lights LEDs on the front panel show the status of the access point During the power up sequence the lights show the results of the power up self diagnostics and provide information about the operating status After the power up sequence the lights show the current operating status and indicate if a problem exists Section 6 Indicator Lights describes the lights in detail 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 2 17 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview 3 Rubber feet Four nonskid rubber feet provide a stable base for the access point when you place it on a desktop or other horizontal surface When the mounting bracket is installed for an access point mounted vertically or on the ceiling the rubber feet provide a small amount of tension to the bracket to help hold it in place 4 ACINPUT TheAC INPUT connector is a standard EC type three prong AC input connector The power cord attaches to this connector The internal power
193. lso provide connectivity in larger routed networks when roaming between IP subnets is not required but where it is desirable to configure a single wireless network across router boundaries OWL IP uses General Router Encapsulation GRE a registered protocol from the TCP IP protocol suite GRE allows frames destined for stations on a different IP subnet to be encapsulated with an IP address that passes transparently through routers Encapsulation is also sometimes referred to as tunnding To simplify configuration OWL IP functionality is treated as an additional port within the access point architecture It is a logical port in that there is no physical radio or wired LAN port associated with OWL I P Encapsulated frames may be sent through any of the three physical ports Access points separated by one or more routers may be thought of as originating and receiving nodes on the two sides of a tunnel that is established through the router 2 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview The forwarding database entry for a station on the other side of the tunnel includes the physical port NIC1 NIC2 or Ethernet the frame should be forwarded through and an indication that encapsulation is required The receiving access point on the other side of the tunnel de encapsulates the frame and then forwards it on the correct physical port OWL IP is described in more detail in Section 4 Configuration
194. m number of attache retries was exceeded without receiving an ATTACH response PDU 900 90F a PDU to the parent brgState 20 bsNetworkTi me SYNTAX Ti meTi cks ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Distributed network time brgState 21 OB ECT TYPE The code indicates the the last o 1 Un er node OB ECT TYPE 01 sec A MAC D link error occurred while sending bsUni Fl oodLevel SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read on STATUS mandato DESCRI PTI ON Flooding leve brgState bsMultiFloodLeve SYNTAX I NTEGER ACCESS read on STATUS mandato DESCRI PTI ON Flooding leve brgState G 68 6710 Access Point User s Guide OBJECT TYPE Cloe y ry frames 1 2 for unicast 22 OB ECT TYPE 0 3 ry for multicast 23 frames 0 3 APPENDIXG MIB bslsPrimaryBri dge OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE if the AP bridges to the distribution LAN brgState 24 bslsSecondaryBridge 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE if the AP is the designated bridge for a secondary LAN brgState 25 bsUniFilterExpr OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Unicast ethernet filter ID 0 255 If the ID is non zero it points to a user defined expression which i
195. m to indicate whether the download completed successfully CheckPoint CheckPoint is a numeric variable that is used to check on the progress of an active download in an access point By setting CheckPoint to a different value after each command in the script file you can read the value to determine how far the access point progressed through the script file You can also test for failure if a script file aborts The variable s format is File sdvars set checkpoint value For example consider the following script file commands 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 19 SECTION5 Software Download file sdvars set checkpoint 1 file fe ab file sdvars set checkpoint 2 file tftp get ustart29 bin ab file sdvars set checkpoint 3 reboot When the software download is started you can use SNMP to query its progress by reading the checkpoint variable If the variable has a value of 2 for example you know that the access point is trying to executethe t ftp get statement If the value is 3 you know the script has completed and the reboot statement was executed Terminate Use Terminate to stop the download process in an access point The variable s format is File sdvars set terminate value If StartTime is counting down setting this variable stops the timer halting the software download process Use caution with this variable If the script file is being downloaded or the commands in the script file are being execut
196. match the specified port socket or SAP A value of 00 00 denotes the subtype as Unlisted 4 46 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION4 Configuration Subtypes for SubTypes 2 are Action SubType Value 1 Pass lt DIX 1P TCP Port gt 00 00 2 Pass DIX IP TCP Port 00 00 3 Pass DIX IP TCP Port 00 00 22 Pass DIX IP TCP Port 00 00 Subtype Value DIX IP TCP Port Port value in hexadecimal DIX IP UDP Port Port value in hexadecimal DI X P Protocol Protocol number in hexadecimal DIX IPX Socket Socket value in hexadecimal DIX EtherType Specify the registered DIX type in hexadeci mal SNAP IP TCP Port Port valuein hexadecimal SNAP IP UDP Port Port valuein hexadecimal SNAP IP Protocol Port value in hexadecimal SNAP IPX Socket Socket value in hexadecimal SNAP EtherType SAP in hexadecimal To filter on both SAP and OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier use advanced filters 802 3 I PX Socket Socket value in hexadecimal 802 2 1PX Socket Socket value in hexadecimal 802 2 SAP SAP in hexadecimal Port values may be entered in decimal by adding a period to the entry For example 23 for port 23 The Value field displays the hexadecimal equivalent 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 47 SECTION 4 Configuration Filtering Examples The following network examples illustrate how filters may be set to optimize wireless performance The sample network in Figure 4 3 contains t
197. mit filter TX Filter option Filter setup is similar to the normal Ethernet filter menu described on page 4 43 Notethat the Ethernet receive filters and the OWL IP transmit filters are both applied to frames forwarded through a tunnel OWL IP filters restrict the frame types that are allowed to be forwarded from the home subnet to remote subnets By default filters are programmed to drop all protocol types except for three protocols specified in the SubTypes 1 screen The types are NNL DI X type 875b IP Address Resolution Protocol ARP DI X 0806 and ICMP 0001 4 84 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration The filter configuration must be changed to allow forwarding of other desired protocols induding TCP or UDP See Appendix E for discussion of OWL IP restrictions and permanent filters Filters must be configured in all super root candidates and OWL IP designated bridges Default filter settings for OWL IP are shown below Action Scope DI X IP TCP Ports Drop lt Unlisted gt DIX 1P UDP Ports lt Drop gt lt Unlisted gt DI X IP Other Protocols Drop Unlisted DI X I PX Sockets Drop A DIX Other EtherTypes lt Drop gt lt Unlisted gt SNAP 1P TCP Ports lt Drop gt Al SNAP IP UDP Ports Drop lt All gt SNAP I P Other Protocols lt Drop gt lt All gt SNAP IPX Sockets lt Drop gt lt All gt SNAP Other EtherTypes lt Drop gt lt All gt 802 3 1PX Sockets lt Drop g
198. mount 3 8 TCP MIB family G 3 Tcpip 4 14 4 16 Technical support 1 4 Telnet 3 6 4 6 E 18 Temperature 900 MHz radio C 1 access point storage A 2 S UHF radio D 1 WLIF radio B 2 Terminal emulation 4 2 4 31 4 34 Terminate variable 5 20 Terminator 3 3 3 11 TFTP dient 2 13 5 10 5 16 commands 5 8 5 10 RAM segment 5 3 script files 5 12 server 2 13 5 9 5 10 software download example 5 29 Thick Ethernet See 1OBASE5 thick Ethernet Thin Ethernet See TOBASE2 thin Ethernet Throughput S UHF radio D 6 D 8 D 10 WLIF radio 4 68 4 69 Time Exceeded E 6 Time Stamp E 6 Time Stamp Reply E 6 Token Ring 2 3 Top level password 4 12 4 86 Trace Route E 6 Transaction rates D 4 D 6 D 8 Translating bridges 2 2 2 4 Transmission MIB family G 3 Transmit mode 4 69 4 72 4 73 Transmit power D 1 Troubleshooting 6 1 Tunnels See also OWL IP establishing E 10 example E 15 E 21 flooding parameters E 9 flooding restrictions E 4 frame forwarding E 11 installation limitations E 2 number allowed E 2 E 13 operation E 7 origination E 9 overview E 2 permanent filters E 4 TX Filter default settings E 6 menu option 4 82 4 84 outbound frames E 11 Type OWL IP 4 83 Type ll PC card 2 17 3 19 D 1 Type III PC card 900 MHz radio C 1 installing 3 17 3 18 PC card slots 2 17 WLIF radio B 1 Type N cable connector B 6 Type N polarized cable connec tor B 6 U UDP 4 44 4 47 E
199. n the field Organization This Preface describes the intended audience for this guide lists related publications and tells how to contact the Customer Response Center Other sections do the following Section 2 Describes the access point and how Features and it operates on the open wireless F unctional LAN It also describes access point Overview components 6710 Access Point User s Guide 1 1 SECTION1 Preface Section 3 Helps you prepare your site before Installation you install the access point and shows how to connect the access point to 1OBASE T 10BASE2 and lOBASES Ethernet Section 4 Describes how to create a Configuration communications session with the access point access FLASH and ROM and set up the access point through its configuration menus Section 5 Describes file system methodology Software Download and the functional characteristics of the software download process Section 6 Describes the access point s ndicator Lights indicator lights and contains troubleshooting tips Appendixes contain supplemental information Appendix A Lists mechanical electrical and environmental specifications for the access point Appendix B Lists specifications and antennas for the WLIF radio Appendix C Lists specifications and antennas for the 900 MHz radio Appendix D Lists specifications and antennas for the synthesized UHF radio It also discusses UHF technology Appendix
200. ncy 4 70 channel 4 75 definition Glossary 5 Glossa ry 10 different subnets 4 79 filtering 2 8 4 43 filtering examples 4 48 flooding inbound frames 4 29 multicast frames 4 32 multicast or broadcast frames 4 33 required levels 4 31 TCP IP 4 35 hello period 4 40 home subnet 4 81 E IP addresses 4 81 E IP networking 4 81 LAN ID 4 24 learning IP addresses of 4 36 Mobile IP E 13 mode 4 75 on different subnets E 1 2 E 4 2 E 4 D Index 13 INDEX Wireless stations Continued pending messages 2 5 power management 2 5 security ID 4 60 subnet filtering E 6 WLIF 4 38 4 39 4 60 WLIF radio antenna cables and connec tors B 6 antenna regulations B 3 countries B 2 data rates B 1 dual radio options 2 9 4 65 flooding 4 30 frequencies B 1 installing 3 17 menu options 4 60 output power B 1 part numbers B 2 range B 1 regulatory compliances B 2 remote antenna kits B 3 specifications B 1 whip antenna B 3 Write command 4 14 Writing the configuration 4 14 X X command 5 25 5 28 Y Yagi antennas B 5 Y modem File Download com mand 5 23 Y modem File to PCMCIA com mand 5 25 5 27 Index 14 6710 Access Point User s Guide
201. nd the procedure following it Ethernet LAN M EY E Telnet 1 PC or workstation with Telnet VT emulator TNVT 2 6710 Access Point Figure 4 2 Telnet Session 4 6 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration 1 Ensurethe access point is connected to the Ethernet cable and has an assigned I P address and cable type 2 Ensurethe PC or workstation has an installed and configured Ethernet interface card 3 Ensurethe Telnet VT emulator is installed on the PC or workstation 4 Open a new Telnet session on the PC or workstation 5 Enter the access point s IP address in the host name or IP address field 6 See Configuring the Access Point on page 4 12 Default and Site Settings The access point is factory configured with the default settings listed in the following charts You may need to change the defaults to match the way your system is set up You can record your site s settings in the table for reference TCP IP Option Default Site Setting IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 0 0 0 0 IP Frame Type DIX DHCP Enabled if IP Ad dress is zero DHCP Server Name Norand DHCP Server Auto ARP Minutes 5 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 7 SECTION 4 Configuration Security Option Default Site Setting Password CR52401 Service Password Enabled Advanced Password empty string Bridge Option Default Site Setting S
202. net filter 4 46 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 E 18 802 2 IPX Socket 4 47 E 18 802 2 Other SAPs Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 802 2 SAP 4 47 E 18 802 3 adding SNAP header 4 41 filtering example 4 48 4 50 E 17 filtering frames 4 44 menu option 4 19 4 41 setting Ethernet type 4 19 802 3 IPX Sockets Ethernet filter 4 44 4 45 example 4 50 4 51 OWL IP filter 4 85 802 3 IPX Socket 4 47 802 5 2 3 900 MHz radio antenna regulations C 2 attach mechanisms 2 6 channelization C 1 countries of operation C 2 coverage C 1 data rates C 1 dual radio options 2 9 file name 4 74 5 1 installing 3 18 menu options 4 74 mode channel 4 74 part numbers C 2 range C 1 regulatory compliances C 1 remote antenna kits C 3 specifications C 1 whip antenna C 2 A AC INPUT port 2 18 3 20 Access Point Configuration screen 4 91 Accessories 2 19 Action 4 45 4 53 4 55 Adding header 4 41 Address OWL IP 4 83 4 84 6710 Access PointUser s Guide INDEX Address Mask Reply E 6 Address Mask Request E 6 Address Resolution Protocol See ARP Addresses broadcast 4 83 4 84 Class B 4 16 E 19 Class C E 13 destination 2 3 4 28 4 37 Ethernet port 4 39 IP 4 16 MAC 2 3 4 38 4 39 4 83 multicast 2 6 4 84 network port 4 39 OWL I P 4 82 4 83 4 84 permanent 4 35 4 42 radio port 4 39 router 4 18 static 4 42 subnet mask 4 17
203. network the channel should be different for all access points The subchannel can be the same as or different than the channel The channel and subchannel could be set as follows the access point number in the first column is arbitrary Access Point Channel Subchannel OOMANAUBWNE OOMANAUBWNE PRP RPRPRPRPP PPP PPP yY Network With 16 or More Access Points When the number of in range access points is 16 or more channels must be reused The channel can be the same for two or more but they should have different subchannels In this case access points using the same channel receive traffic for another access point but discard frames with the incorrect subchannel To minimize interference access points using the same channel but different subchannels should be physically located outside the radio range of one another 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 63 SECTION4 Configuration EXAMPLE 2 If 43 access points are on the network 1 to 15 could be assigned the channel and subchannel numbers in the previous example Access points 16 to 43 could be set as follows the access point number in the first column is arbitrary Access Point Channel Subchannel 16 1 2 17 2 2 18 3 2 19 4 2 20 5 2 21 6 2 22 7 2 23 8 2 24 9 2 25 10 2 26 11 2 27 12 2 28 13 2 29 14 2 30 15 2 31 1 3 32 2 3 33 3 3 34 4 3 35 5 3 36 6 3 37 7 3 38 8 3 39 9 3 40 10 3 41 11 3 42 12 3 43 13 3 4 64 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4
204. nly to secondary Ethernet LANs that have unicast or multicast flooding or both enabled Unicast and multicast flooding options for secondary Ethernet LANs start on page 4 59 ARP Server Mode ARP Server Mode can convert multicast ARP requests to unicast ARP requests for stations in the forwarding database ARP Server Mode can significantly improve wireless network performance in busy IP networks Settings are Disabled No Flooding Delay Flooding Normal Flooding When ARP Server Mode is enabled the IP addresses are included in the forwarding database entry for the station The ARP server learns the IP addresses of wireless stations by monitoring ARP packets Additionally some stations may have the capability of explicitly registering IP addresses with the ARP server 4 36 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Setting Disabled default No Flooding Delay Flooding Normal Flooding SECTION4 Configuration Description No special action is taken when an ARP is received Multicast ARP requests are subject to the Ethernet filters and the flood ing settings The Disabled setting is useful when a system has no P radio traffic or has stations that do not register IP addresses ARP server converts ARPs from multicast to the unicast address of the destination sta tion NoFlooding is the most efficient con figuration since multicast ARPs are never forwarded Use of this setting requires sta tions to register IP addres
205. nnels are not adjustable The super root and designated bridges for OWL IP tunnels indude additional configurable output transmit filters allowing frame types forwarded through tunnels to be tightly controlled These filters are provided in addition to the standard Ethernet input filters available in all access points Tunnel Origination Building the Spanning Tree The open wireless LAN spanning tree is established and maintained by short hello messages originating at the super root Hellos are broadcast periodically at intervals of a few seconds These frames contain network coordination information including root priority At power up all super root candidates listen for hello messages If they do not detect hellos or detect hellos from a lower priority root candidate they begin to send hello messages 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 9 APPENDIX E OWL IP If a super root candidate receives a hello from an access point with a higher root priority or equal root priority from a higher MAC address it stops sending hellos This root election protocol continues until only one super root access point sends hellos After the super root is established other access points attach to the super root forming the spanning tree Establishing and Maintaining Tunnels Once a super root is elected it begins to forward hello messages to P addresses configured in the OWL IP menu Designated bridge candidates on a remote subnet use
206. norandN et nBridge bridgeStats x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 17 7 X OID Object Name Object Type Access 3 bstcRouteCount Gauge read 4 bstcChildCount Gauge read 5 bstcChildApCount Gauge read 6 bstcRemoteCount Gauge read 7 bstcPrimaryCount Gauge read 8 bstcl nboundCount Gauge read 9 bstcSecondaryCount Gauge read 10 bstcRemoteL anCount Gauge read 11 bstcRouteGetE rrors Counter read 12 bstcE ntryGetE rrors Counter read 13 bstcRmtL anGetE rrors Counter read 14 bstcRouteSegE rrors Counter read 15 bstcDeleteSegE rrors Counter read 16 bstcE ntrySegE rrors Counter read 17 bstcl nvalidU pdateE rrors Counter read Control Groups Objects in the following groups exert control over the 6710 Access Point Present functions include rebooting and scheduling software downloads NOTE The MIB definition for each group starts on the page given below powerU p Power U p Objects page G 72 softwareDownLoad Software Download page G 72 G 22 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB Table G 22 powerUp GROUP Device Power Up Objects norand manage norandN et nControl powerU p x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 105 1 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 1 pwrPowerU pCount Counter read 2 pwrN extP owerU pTime TimeTicks write Table G 23 softwareDownLoad GROUP Device Software Download norand manage norandN et nControl softwareDownL oad x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 105 2 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 1 sdStartTime TimeTi
207. not been started In either case the access point back off algorithm should prevent excessive network traffic when many access points are trying to contact a TFTP server When you type TFTP client commands at the command line the access point does not retry failed transfers Near the end of this section is a detailed example of how to use TFTP to upgrade an access point with a new version of FLASH The example incorporates most of the TFTP commands TFTP Server Usethe Server command to display TFTP commands The format is File tftp server These commands are supported Help for Server command Argument Description Start Start TFTP server Stop Stop TFTP server Log Display TFTP server message log Display this help 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 9 SECTION5 Software Download Server Start Use Server Start to enable the access point as a TFTP server Theformat is File tftp server start After you issue this command the access point responds to TFTP dient requests directed to its IP address When acing as a server the access point TFTP supports up to four concurrent TFTP sessions Server Stop Use Server Stop to stop the access point from being a TFTP server when you are done transferring files The format is File gt tftp server stop After you issue this command the access point no longer responds to TFTP client requests Current TFTP sessions with the server are completed however Server Log
208. ns Section 5 Software Download describes the commands and file system methodology View View or modify configuration program settings See U sing the View Command on page 4 14 Clear Reset the access point s configuration to the facto ry set default settings which start on page 4 7 Read Load the most recent configuration from EEPROM The configuration that was written to EEPROM since the access point was last rebooted becomes the new configuration 6710 Access Point User s Guide 4 13 SECTION 4 Configuration Use Read Continued Write Reboot Exit To The access point s configuration is stored in EEPROM You reprogram the EEPROM whenever you change the configuration write save the new configuration to EEPROM and reboot the access point Write save a new configuration to EEPROM This command overwrites the previous configura tion You must write the new configuration to EEPROM and reboot the access point for any changes to take effect Reboot the access point You must reboot the unit for any changes you made to the configuration to take effect Quit the configuration program If you exit a new configuration without writing it to EEPROM any changes you made are not saved Display online help for a command option or setting Using the View Command To view or modify configuration program settings type View at the command prompt TheMain Options Menu appears Tcpi p
209. nsparently to commonly used network protocols such as TCP IP Novell SPX IPX NetBEUI and DECnet In wired LANs bridges do the following Segment traffic for better efficiency and performance Extend the reach of LANs when cable length or node limits have been reached Translate between different LAN types such as IEEE 802 3 Ethernet and 802 5 Token Ring A LAN environment normally consists of a collection of nodes or stations each identified by a unique 48 bit physical address also called an IEEE address or MAC address Data is sent on the LAN as frames or packets that contain the source address of the station sending the frame and the destination address of the recipient station A bridge has at least two ports each connected to a different LAN segment Bridges learn which source addresses are generating traffic on each of their ports If the bridge receives a frame with a destination address corresponding to a source address it has seen on another port it forwards the frame tothe port If it receives a frame where the source and destination addresses are on the same port it ignores drops the frame since the destination node receives the original transmission Generally if a bridge receives a frame for an unknown destination address on any one port it floods the frame on all other ports 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 2 3 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Access Point Bridging Layer The 6710 Access Point
210. nt User s Guide 2 1 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview The access point functions as a 4 port translating bridge Functionality within the access point can be partitioned into two major functional blocks bridging functionality and managenent functionality Bridging functions pertain to the forwarding of data through the access point Management functionality involves configuration software upgrade and network management Figure 2 2 is a simplified diagram showing the functions within the access point Management and Configuration Bridging E MIB d REN ect sap eT OO S c 1 Een n 4 SNMP puc Agent TCP IP ge Port 4 L TCP P esi Bridging a OWLAP TFTP HTTP Telnet pue qnoa cg NA Proxy ARP File Device System Configuration ROR TUR dE d Figure 2 2 6710 Access Point Functions Bridging Functionality General Concepts Bridges are common components in wired LANs Bridges are devices that join two or more LAN segments This provides the appearance of a single LAN segment to the protocols and applications that operate within the LAN 2 2 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Bridges operate at the Media Access Control MAC sublayer of the Data Link Layer Layer 2 of the International Organization for Standardization ISO protocol model Operating at the MAC layer allows bridges to operate tra
211. nt number or segment name the access point searches the segments in this order until it finds a file matching the file name RAM 1 2 3 4 Downloading Programs You can download new programs to the access point while it is operating The unit has two program FLASH directories so that if an issue exists with the download of the new FLASH the system can reboot to the previous version An internal timer allows the activation of the new software program to be immediate or activated at a later time File Menu Commands Commands for software download and other processes are located on the File Menu To display the commands type the following at the Main Menu prompt gt file 5 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION5 Software Download TheFile Menu appears Loading configuration from EEPROM Comma nd Description Fb fb boot segment data segment Fd fd lt segment gt all directory list Fdel fdel filename delete file Fe fe lt segment gt all erase segment s Tftp File transfer Script Execute script files SDVars Software download variables Exit Return to main menu File Fb Command UseFbto make inactive segments active The format is File fb boot segment data segment boot segment is the name or number of the boot segment to be activated Boot segments are 1 and 2 or AB active boot and IB inactive boot data segment is the name or number of the
212. nted to zero on its own the access point does not reboot When the timer does count down to zero it checks the value of the SetActiveP ointers variable takes the appropriate action as described above and then reboots the access point 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 21 SECTION 5 Software Download ROM Command Monitor NOTE Certain functions available through the ROM command monitor can erase your configuration information Intermec STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you only use this option when absolutely necessary for example to upgrade your FLASH software or when instructed to do so and under the supervision or direction of qualified Intermec personnel Starting the Command Monitor You can access the ROM command monitor only through the DIAG port Start the command monitor by turning the access point off then back on After the access point has completed its power up self tests you have about 5 seconds to open the ROM command monitor by pressing any key on the PC keyboard See Creating a Local DIAG Port Session in Section 4 for more information on how to access ROM mode You cannot invoke the command monitor once the access point has started the FLASH program If the access point enters its boot sequence you have to reboot the access point to open the ROM command monitor When the ROM command monitor opens the following displays on the PC QXS6700K Vx xx MMM DD YYYY ap gt QXS6700K is the program name of the RO
213. nterfere with radio signals However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning our equipment off and on the user is encour aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help FCC Spread Spectrum Radio Certification This device is certified to operate under Part 15 Subpart C Section 15 247 of the FCC rules for Intentional Radiation Products This certification includes Docket 87 389 covering rules effective J une 1994 It may not cause interference to authorized radio communication devices and must accept any interference caused by those devices Antenna Requirements FCC rules section 15 203 and Canada s RSS 210 require that this device be oper ated using an antenna furnished by Intermec Technologies Corporation The an tenna coupling on this product has been designed to accept only antennas manufactured by us Use of an antenna other than that furnished with the equip ment is prohibited by FCC and Industry Canad
214. nts on different subnets without losing network connections for Wireless stations using Internet Protocol IP Wireless stations using other network protocols such as NORAND Network Layer NNL that are normally not routable OWL IP is activated by enabling the OWL IP port in the access point The port is an entryway to an IP tunnel originated by the super root on the home subng and terminated by a designated bridge operating on a remote subnet Figure 4 5 Frames forwarded through the tunnel are encapsulated using the Generic Router Encapsulation GRE protocol running over IP 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 79 SECTION 4 Configuration Server or Gateway Remote Subnet 1 AP2 Designated Bridge Tunnel IP Router AP4 Designated Bridge Remote Subnet 2 Non IP Station IP Station Figure 4 5 OWL IP Overview The super root can originate IP tunnels to eight or fewer IP addresses The number of tunnels supported may be more than or fewer than eight depending on the type of addressing used and redundancy needs within the installation OWL IP tunnels are configured using the following steps 1 Choose which subnet is the home subnet and which subnets are remote subnets If possible choose the subnet that contains gateways or servers for wireless stations as the home subnet however these servers may be on other subnets if necessary 4 80 6
215. ocate the active IP addresses for the subnet P addresses for access points should not be allowed to expire The network management program would then need to ping all potential addresses on a subnet to locate active IP addresses or require the user to enter a list 4 22 60710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Bridge Options NOTE Use Bridge to configure options that define the bridging topology of the open wireless LAN Options are Serial Number Uni que 10 digit number Lan ID 0 Root Ports ARP Server Mode Di sabl ed gt Serial Number Serial Number is a read only setting that displays this access point s unique 10 digit serial number which identifies this unit on the network Lan ID The LAN ID also called domain is a number that logically isolates adjacent but independent open wireless LANs The prompt is Range is 0 254 Following are ranges 900 MHz and S UHF radios 0 default to 254 WLIF radio Oto 15 For mixed systems containing WLIF radios you must use LAN ID 0 to 15 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 23 SECTION 4 NOTE Configuration You should change the default of 0 to another number to avoid a potential conflict with an adjacent network All access points and wireless stations in the same network must have the same LAN ID See page 4 87 for information about combining WLIF 900 MHz and S UHF radios in a common network by following basic
216. oint User s Guide SECTION5 Software Download Script File Command Summary Following is a description of the commands you can indude in a download script file You can issue these commands manually from the access point from the gt prompt on the command line Most script file commands are executed from within the file command submenu You or the script file can issue these commands in either of two ways Use the File command to descend into the file submenu level where you can execute file system commands until you use the Exit command to return to the gt prompt You can preface any file level command with the word File which causes the command processor to execute one command in the file command level and return to the gt prompt For example the command sequences in the following two charts are equivalent Command Sequence 1 file feib fe id exit Command Sequence 2 filefeib file fe id Description Descend to the File gt command prompt Erase the inactive boot segment Erase the inactive data segment Return to the gt prompt Description Erase the inactive boot segment Erase the inactive data segment 6710 Access Point User s Guide 5 15 SECTION5 Software Download In addition all commands are case insensitive so FILE FE ID is the same as file fe id TFTP Client Command Retry When executing a script file the access point retries
217. ols lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt SNAP IPX Sockets lt Drop gt lt All gt SNAP Other EtherTypes lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt 802 3 1 PX Sockets lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt 802 2 I PX Sockets Pass Unlisted 802 2 Other SAPs Pass Unlisted Example 2 Access points 2 and 4 in Figure 4 3 service IP wireless stations as well as wired IP and IPX hosts on the secondary LAN These access points have an additional requirement to pass IPX traffic The IPX router in this network periodically sends I PX RIP Routing Information Protocol frames for coordinating with other routers These do not need to be forwarded to the secondary LAN because the secondary LAN does not contain a router To filter the RIP frames it is necessary to usethe SubTypes 1 configurations The example sets filters for three different cases DI X 802 2 or 802 3 SNAP frames In many actual networks only one of these would be required since all stations would be configured for one of the three options 4 50 6710 Access PointUser s Guide SECTION4 Configuration In example 2 Frame Types is set as follows Acti on Scope DI X I P TCP Ports Pass All DI X I P UDP Ports Pass lt All gt DIX 1P Other Protocols lt Pass gt lt All gt DI X I PX Sockets Pass Unlisted DIX Other EtherTypes lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt SNAP IP TCP Ports Pass AMI SNAP IP UDP Ports Pass lt All gt SNAP 1 P Other P
218. ons cable segments must meet ANSI IEEE standard specifications Glossary 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide GLOSSARY Single Frequency Subnet If a wireless station is using a single frequency it operates on the selected frequency in a list of frequencies The de fault is the first frequency in the list A subnet is a single member of the collection of hardware networks that compose an IP network Host addresses on a given subnet share an IP network number with hosts on all other subnets of that IP network The local address part is divided into subnet number and hostnumber fields to indicate which subnet a host is on A particular division of the local address part is not assumed this could vary from network to network Unicast Address Wireless Hops A unicast address is a unique Ethernet address assigned to a single station on the network A wirdess hop is a wireless connection to an open wireless LAN For the access point a wireless hop means connect ing to the open wireless LAN spanning tree through its RF port instead of its Ethernet port The major advantage of using a wireless connection to the LAN is that it reduces and sometimes even eliminates the requirements for LAN cabling 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Glossary 9 GLOSSARY The wireless access point provides a wireless store and for ward operation a hop with each frame transmitted twice over the wireless media to reach its destination Because fram
219. oot priority of 0 Redundancy is the ability of another access point to take over if the super root goes offline You should do the following Configure one access point as a primary super root with the highest root priority Configure one or two access points as fallback super roots with lower priority Configure remaining access points with a root priority of 0 Global Radio Use the same Global Radio settings in all super root candidates Global Radio distributes network wide configuration parameters Settings in the super root are distributed throughout the network Options are Set Globall Value UHF Rfp Threshold Di sabl ed gt 70 UHF Frag Size lt Di sabl ed gt 250 Falcon Frag Size lt Di sabl ed gt 250 Awake Ti me Di sabl ed gt 0 6710 Access Point User s Guide 4 25 SECTION 4 Configuration The previous sample screen shows the options default settings which are optimum for most installations It is recommended that you not change the defaults Option UHF Rfp Threshold UHF Frag Size Falcon Frag Size Awake Time Does not apply to WLIF radio 4 26 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Description This option adjusts the S UHF protocol characteristics for smaller data frames The recommended setting in most cases is Disabled For installations that primari ly send very small frames Enabled at the default value of 70 may improve network response ti me For reliable transmission la
220. or single frequen Cy operation splitting the wireless station population equally among the available fre quencies Both options require that you configure the access points on unique frequencies Option 1 Option 1 is recommended when the system cannot be installed so that each access point covers the entire area In this case you must install the access points so that all of them overlap in high usage area where wireless station populations and transaction rates are greatest Frequency agile software in the wireless stations allows roaming between frequencies The wireless stations employ a load balancing algorithm so that the number of wireless stations on each frequency is about the same at all times If frequency agility is used and the wireless stations are normally powered up in an area of overlapping coverage you can speed up network attachment by setting different default frequencies in the wireless stations for initial load balancing This shortens the period required for the load balancing algorithm to adjust Option 2 Option 2 is recommended if the coverage area is small enough that all access points can be installed to cover the full area See Figure D 3 6710 Access Point User s Guide D 9 APPENDIXD S UHF Specifications and Antennas 32 or fewer wireless stations in this area zz 60 wireless stations maxi mum in overlap area two d f e M E frequencies 7 E aa aa E A gt 4 foe
221. ortState GROUP ccc eee eee G 13 Table G 12 portStats GROUP 2 0000ee G 14 Table G 13 ptxq GROUP cece e eens G 15 Table G 14 pmsg GROUP sssesesseese G 16 Table G 15 community TABLE ss G 17 Table G 16 trapTarget TABLE ssseeese G 17 Table G 17 rt GROUP cc cece G 18 Table G 18 brg GROUP cece eens G 19 Table G 19 addr GROUP cece e eee eee G 20 Table G 20 brgState GROUP cece eee eee G 20 Table G 21 bridgeStats GROUP G 22 Table G 22 powerUp GROUP sssssees G 23 Table G 23 softwareDownLoad GROUP G 23 xiv 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Section 1 Preface Purpose of This Guide This user s guide describes the installation setup and maintenance of the 6710 Access Point This guide covers access point FLASH version 1 27 or greater and ROM version 1 12 or greater Norand Corporation is now part of Intermec Technologies Corporation As part of our continuing efforts to offer the broadest range of system solutions in the industry the 6710 Access Point and other open wireless local area network LAN components have been merged into the INTERMEC Integrated Network Communications Architecture INCA Where appropriate we have continued to use the Norand name in references to the open wireless LAN to maintain continuity with existing product i
222. ory DESCRI PTI ON Secondary LAN bridge table entries bridgeStats 9 G 70 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB bstcRemoteLanCount 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Route entries for remote LANs bridgeStats 10 bstcRouteGetErrors OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Route table overflow errors bridgeStats 11 bstcEntryGetErrors 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Bridge table overflow errors bridgeStats 12 bstcRmtLanGetErrors 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Remote LAN overflow errors bridgeStats 13 bstcRouteSegErrors 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Qut of sequence route update errors bridgeStats 14 bstcDeleteSegErrors 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Qut of sequence route delete errors bridgeStats 15 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 71 APPENDIXG M B bstcEntrySegErrors 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Out of sequence bridge entry update errors bridgeStats 16 bstclnvalidUpdateErrors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Invalid route update errors bridgeStat
223. ounter pstclnUcastOWLDataPkts Counter pstclnNUcastOWLDataPkts Counter pstcl nOWLErrors Counter pstcOutOWLPkts Counter pstcOutUcastOWLDataPkts Counter pstcOutNUcastOWLDataPkts Counter pstcOutOWLErrors Counter pstcParentLinkErrors Counter pstcAlertLinkErrors Counter pstclnUcastRelayPkts Counter pstclnNUcastRelayPkts Counter pstcOutUcastRelayPkts Counter pstcOutNUcastRelayPkts Counter pstci nUcasti nbound Counter pstci nUcastOutbound Counter pstcl nUcastSec Counter pstci nUcastFl ood Counter pstcinUcastDi scar ds Counter pstci nNUcastDi scar ds Counter pstcil nUcastTol FC Counter pstcl nNUcastTol FC Counter pstcOutDel ayDi scar ds Counter 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 41 APPENDIXG M B pstcPort OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 1 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R port ID 1 4 A number which uniquely identifies the port pstcEntry 1 j pstcl nOWLPkts 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Total received OWL packets pstcEntry 2 pstclnUcastOWLDataPkts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Received OWL unicast data packets pstcEntry 3 pstcl mNUcastOWLDataPkts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Received multicast OWL data packets pstcEntry 4 pstcl nOWLErrors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESC
224. ple 1 Example 2 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 23 4 23 4 23 4 25 4 25 4 27 4 27 4 28 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 36 4 36 4 36 4 38 4 39 4 39 4 40 4 40 4 41 4 41 4 42 4 42 4 43 4 44 4 46 4 46 4 48 4 49 4 50 CONTENTS Advanced RX Filter 0 ccc eee cee ees 4 52 Expressions i inerea Gada eth e Ras 4 52 EXprSeQ i veda Gade GG E a EN a eta 4 53 OHSS o nad oii tek dct oad taret Qdots 4 54 MaSK ihia aa ia ee eee 4 54 8 o E E E 4 54 Value qti nter cet t D EET a 4 55 ACUION S hands Em 4 55 Values os ore ere eres ge e e ware 4 56 Bridging oom Reto Robotic o AER 4 57 Bridge Priority ssssesssssseeeeess 4 57 Designated Bridge Candidates 4 57 Designated Bridge Selection 4 58 SUMMARY orere rx ox hac hy RR nd 4 58 Status i sve eoe BSA Ree AD a DR 4 58 Flood Register uussesssssssseeeeree 4 59 WLIF Options sssseeeeR I 4 60 Security Id ziii ER ees dep e 4 60 Node Type wi dm bee ER e E T eee 4 61 Master Parms 0 ccc cece cece RR 4 62 Channel and Subchannel 00005 4 62 Network With 15 or Fewer Access Points 4 63 Network With 16 or More Access Points 4 63 Wireless HOPS 0 cece eee sees 4 65 Slave ParmS 0 ccc cece ee RI 4 66 MAG COMP Tornia marea en tp Aere onal nte 4 68 Manual MAC Parms een 4 69 Hop Period cece hee eke ee n xe gne 4 70 Beacon Frequency
225. ponents 3 2 menu options 4 41 port 2 7 4 38 troubleshooting the connec tion 6 2 ETHERNET light group 6 2 Examples channel 4 63 4 64 4 68 Ethernet filtering 4 48 OWL IP configurations E 13 E 19 OWL IP filtering E 17 sample network 2 14 script file 5 14 subchannel 4 63 4 64 4 68 TFTP software download 5 29 wireless WLIF hops 4 65 Exit command 4 14 5 25 5 28 Exiting configuration menus 4 14 ROM password submenu 5 28 Expressions 4 52 ExprSeq 4 53 Exterior Gateway Protocol E 5 F Fairness slot 4 69 4 70 Falcon 4 38 4 39 4 74 Falcon Frag Size 4 25 4 26 4 27 Falcon radio See 900 MHz radio Falcon_d 29k 4 74 5 1 5 6 5 14 FB s command 5 25 5 26 FC s command 5 23 FCC 4 77 FD command 5 23 5 25 Fd command 5 6 FE command 5 25 F e command 5 8 FFR f command 5 25 5 26 FHDR29K EXE 5 13 FI command 5 25 5 26 Figures Seelllustrations File command 4 13 File names 900 MHz radio 4 74 5 1 FLASH 5 1 5 6 5 7 5 9 1 5 S UHF radio 4 76 5 1 5 6 script files 5 13 segments 5 3 USTART29 BIN 5 1 5 6 5 7 5 9 with system commands 5 4 File System Directory com mand 5 6 5 23 5 25 File system menu 4 13 5 5 File System Reset command 5 25 5 26 Filtering advanced RX 4 52 ARP server mode 4 37 common network protocols 4 44 examples 4 48 normal RX 4 43 overview 2 8 OWL IP configuring filters 4 84 default se
226. psPendE nabled INTEGER read 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 13 APPENDIXG MIB Table G 12 portStats GROUP Device Port Statistics norand manage norandN et nl nterfaces portStats x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 2 4 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 4 1 1 pstcPort INTEGER read 4 1 2 pstclnOWLPkts Counter read 4 1 3 pstclnUcastOWL DataPkts Counter read 4 1 4 pstclnNUcastOWL DataPkts Counter read 4 15 pstcl nOWLErrors Counter read 4 1 6 pstcOutOWL Pkts Counter read 4 1 7 pstcOutU castOWL DataPkts Counter read 4 1 8 pstcOutNUcastOWLDataPkts Counter read 4 1 9 pstcOUtOWLErrors Counter read 4 1 10 pstcParentLinkErrors Counter read 4 1 11 pstcAlertLinkErrors Counter read 4 1 12 pstcl nU castRelayP kts Counter read 4 1 13 pstcl nN U castRelayP kts Counter read 4 1 14 pstcOutU castRelayP kts Counter read 4 1 15 pstcOutN U castRelayP kts Counter read 4 1 16 pstcl nU casti nbound Counter read 4 1 17 pstcl nU castOutbound Counter read 4 1 18 pstcl nU castSec Counter read 4 1 19 pstcl nU castF lood Counter read 4 1 20 pstcU castDiscards Counter read 4 1 21 pstcl nN U castDiscards Counter read 4 1 22 pstcl nU castTol FC Counter read 4 1 23 pstci nNUcastTol FC Counter read 4 1 24 pstcOutDelayDiscards Counter read G 14 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB Table G 13 ptxq GROUP Device Port Transmit Queue norand manage norandN et nl nterfaces ptxq x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 2 5 x
227. r s Guide 4 15 SECTION 4 Configuration TCP IP Options Use Tcpip to set options necessary for communications with this access point such as IP addresses Addresses are required for remote setup or SNMP network management Options are IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 0 0 0 0 IP Frame Type DI X DHCP Enabled if IP address is zero DHCP Server Name Norand DHCP Server Auto ARP Mi nutes 5 IP Address IP Address is the unique address locally assigned to this access point The prompt is Range is 4 nums 0 255 The default is 0 0 0 0 which disables the ability to use TCP IP Following are suggestions for setting the address If you are installing this access point on an existing Ethernet segment you should allocate the IP address from the same pool as the existing computers on the segment If you are installing this access point on a new Ethernet segment that is not going to connect to the Internet try using this Class B address 172 16 h h 4 16 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration The host number is h h This Class B network address is reserved by the numbering authority for a company s internal use If the Class B address appears on the Internet routers drop the data Note the following If the IP address is 0 0 0 0 and DHCP is set to Enabled if IP address is zero this IP address is obtained through DHCP If DHCP is set to Enabled DHC
228. re set to pass the following frame types and drop all others DIX 0875B NNL DI X 0806 ARP P Protocol ICMP 1 supporting the following frame types Address Mask Reply 18 Address Mask Request 17 Alternate Host Address 6 Destination Unreachable 3 Echo Reply 0 Echo Request 8 Parameter Problem 12 Redirect 5 Source Quench 4 Time Exceeded 11 Time Stamp 13 Time Stamp Reply 14 Trace Route 30 Subnet Filtering OWL IP automatically provides subnet filtering for IP wireless stations Designated bridges never forward frames to the home subnet unless the P address belongs to the home subnet This feature prevents inbound flooding of undesired IP traffic E 6 6710 Access PointUser s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P Password Security The access point has two levels of password security Knowledge of the standard password allows general access to the configuration menus If desired the OWL IP configuration can be access protected by enabling the Advanced Password in the Security menu Operation OWL IP uses IP encapsulation to establish a virtual LAN segment through an IP router The OWL IP tunnel becomes a branch in the spanning tree Access points on the remote subnet are linked to the super root through a designated bridge Operation is analogous to secondary LANs where wireless links are used to connect Ethernet segments Figure E 1 shows Ethernet segments connected by a wireless link Figure E 2 shows
229. rface Cards NI Cs The access point also has a logical OWL IP port Ethernet Port The Ethernet port can be configured to support TOBASE T twisted pair LOBASE 2 thinnet or an AUI connection The AUI connection can support 1OBASE5 thicknet or LOBASEF fiber optic connections with the appropriate media adapters 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 2 7 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview The physical connections are on the bottom panel of the access point The desired Ethernet medium is selectable through the device configuration menus Section 3 Installation has more information about connecting the access point to Ethernet media Section 4 Configuration describes how to set the medium through the configuration menus Ethernet Port Filters The Ethernet port can be configured to support a variety of preconfigured and custom input filters Access points are commonly installed on LANs that carry traffic for wired and wireless devices Setting filters prevents unnecessary traffic from the wired LAN from being forwarded onto the wireless medium This is important because common wireless technologies operate at data rates below Ethernet speeds Normally filters are set to pass traffic known to be or likely to be destined for wireless stations and drop traffic not destined for stations requiring wireless connectivity Filtering occurs in the Ethernet driver software that controls low level operation of the Ethern
230. rge frames may be fragmented or split into several smaller frames Thereceiver reassembles the fragments into a complete frame The default is 250 For reliable transmission large frames may be fragmented or split into several smaller frames Thereceiver reassembles the fragments into a complete frame The default is 250 This option establishes an awake time after a station transmits Portable stations do not enter a power managed state for this time period The access point may deliver a response without using the pending message delivery mechanism during the awake time The time is specified in tenths of seconds When awake time is Disabled the default each station uses its own default 2 seconds for 900 MHz or S UHF stations Longer awake times may reduce station battery life SECTION4 Configuration Each Global Radio option has the following settings Set Globally Di sabl ed gt Value 0 Set Globally The value for all radios in the system is specified according to how Set Globally is configured Setting Description Enabled If this access point is the super root it sets the value for all stations and access points in the network This setting has no effect in access points other than the super root Disabled The super root does not distribute global default parameters All radios in the network use local settings or defaults Value Following are ranges and defaults for the Value option Value R
231. ridge for a secondary Ethernet LAN attaches to the network through a radio port or through an En terprise Open Wireless LAN Enterprise OWL port when establishing an IP tunnel A wired access point is an access point that attaches to the network through an Ethernet link and has bridg ing disabled through the configuration menus A wirdess access point is an access point that attaches tothe network through a radio port A wireless access point provides a wireless store and forward operation with frames transmitted over the wireless media to reach their destination 6710 Access Point User s Guide Glossary 1 GLOSSARY Bridging Broadcast Channel In this manual bridging refers to the translational bridging process of converting open wireless LAN frames to Ethernet frames and Ethernet frames to open wireless LAN frames A broadcast is a transmission to all wireless stations at the same time Channd refers to a logical data channel A port may con tain one or more channels Data for any given wireless sta tion is contiguous on a channel Each of the remote ports on a controller may contain up to three channels apiece Designated Bridge Access points physically connected to a secondary physical LAN and within the radio coverage area of an access point on the distribution LAN are candidates to become the des ignated bridge for the secondary LAN The designated bridge is a particular access point assigned the role of br
232. riority O AP 21 and AP 22 AP 31 and AP 32 etc are configured as designated bridge candidates for their respective subnets 6710 Access PointUser s Guide E 19 APPENDIXE OWL P AP1 Server for AP2 4 4 Server for Super Root IP Stations 112 16 19 36 172 16 16 101 NNE Stations 172 16 23 141 bur 172 16 8 1 e mmen 17216 16 1 IP Router Home Subnet AP 11 AP 12 AP 13 172 16 32 2 172 16 32 3 172 16 32 4 Leer 172 16 8 2 e macna 172 16 32 1 IP Router AP 21 AP 22 AP 23 172 16 40 2 172 16 40 3 172 16 40 4 Laer 172 16 8 3 i ay W 172 16 40 1 IP Router AP 31 AP 32 AP 33 172 16 48 2 172 16 48 3 172 16 48 4 Leer 172 16 8 4 nj 172 16 48 1 IP Router FigureE 4 Example Class B Configuration E 20 6710 Access PointUser s Guide APPENDIXE OWL P Step 3 The two super root candidates are configured to originate tunnels Option A Unicast Addressing In this example unicast IP addresses are entered in the table for each designated bridge The two designated bridges on each subnet will negotiate which access point serves as the designated bridge for that subnet Use of two designated bridge candidates on each subnet restricts the number of subnets that can be supported to four Toincreasethe size of the wireless network it is necessary to eliminate redundant designated bridges or use broadcast addressing Type Address Uni cast 17
233. ritical errors The MIB definition for each group starts on the page given below hw Hardware Information page G 24 fsinfo File System I nformation page G 25 segment File Segment Information page G 26 dir Software Directory Listing page G 28 criticalErrors Critical Errors Information page G 30 TableG 5 hw GROUP Device Hardware Information norand manage norandN et nSystem hw x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 1 1 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 1 hwPartNo INTEGER read 2 hwDescription DisplayString read 3 hwRevision INTEGER read 4 hwSerialNo INTEGER read 5 hwl D INTEGER read 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 9 APPENDIXG M B Table G 6 fsinfo GROUP DeviceFile System I nformation norand manage norandN et nSystem file fsinfo x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 1 3 1 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 1 fsE nabled INTEGER read 2 fsM axSectors INTEGER read 3 fsSectorSize INTEGER read 4 fsNumSegments INTEGER read 5 fsN um iles Gauge read 6 fsBootSegment INTEGER read 7 fsDataSegment INTEGER read Table G 7 segment GROUP Device File Segment Information norand manage norandN et nSystem file segment x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 1 3 2 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 2 11 seglD INTEGER read 2 1 2 segFirstSector INTEGER read 2 13 segLastSector INTEGER read 2 1 4 segStatus INTEGER read 2 15 segSize INTEGER read 2 1 6 segFree INTEGER read G 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB
234. rk through its OWL IP port and is the designated bridge for a secondary Ethernet LAN Unit is attached to the network through an RF radio connection Unit is operating as the super root Unit is attached to network through an RF connection and is the designated bridge for a secondary Ethernet LAN 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 6 5 SECTION6 Indicator Lights PCMCIA Lights PCMCIA indicator lights show the status of the two PC card slots which are labeled NIC1 and NIC2 Theleft light shows the status of NIC1 the right light shows the status of NIC2 Table 6 5 shows light indications for both ports Table 6 5 PCMCIA Indicator Lights Status Indication OFF A functional or enabled radio is not installed in the slot ON A functional and enabled radio is installed in the slot BLINK Installed radio is active and has communicated with a wireless station in the past 10 minutes When the access point reboots in ROM mode the R LINK W LINK NIC1 and NIC2 indicator lights show for about nine seconds the DIAG port s baud rate The lights show the status about eight seconds after the W LINK light stops blinking Table 6 6 shows baud rates Table 6 6 DIAG Port Baud Rates ROM Mode R LINK W LINK NIC1 NIC2 Baud Rate OFF OFF OFF ON 2400 OFF OFF ON OFF 4800 OFF OFF ON ON 9600 OFF ON OFF OFF 14400 OFF ON OFF ON 19200 OFF ON ON OFF 28800 OFF ON ON ON 38400 ON OFF OFF OFF 57600 6 6 6710 Access PointUser s Guide
235. rotocols lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt SNAP IPX Sockets lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt SNAP Other EtherTypes lt Pass gt lt Unlisted gt 802 3 I PX Sockets Pass Unlisted 802 2 I PX Sockets Pass Unlisted 802 2 Other SAPs Pass Unlisted SubTypes 1 options are configured to drop IPX RIP for 802 2 DI X and 802 3 frames DIX is already specified as a predefined filter For 802 2 and 802 3 frames it is necessary to use a user defined filter In example 2 SubTypes 1 is set as follows Action SubType Value DI X ARP Pass lt DIX EtherType gt 06 SNAP ARP Pass lt SNAP EtherType gt 06 802 2 1 PX RIP Drop 802 2 IPX Socket 51 802 2 I PX SAP Pass 802 2 IPX Socket 53 NNL Pass lt DIX EtherType gt 5b NETBI 0S Pass 802 2 SAP f0 1 Drop DIX IPX Socket 51 2 Drop 802 3 IPX Socket 51 3 Pass DIX IP TCP Port 00 4 Pass DIX IP TCP Port 00 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 51 SECTION 4 Configuration Advanced RX Filter If you need more flexibility than that provided by Normal RX Filter you can use the tables for Advanced RX Filter to specify additional filters Settings for Advanced RX Filter execute after those for Normal RX Filter For example if Normal RX Filter dropped a frame the frame cannot be undropped If Normal RX Filter passed a frame Advanced RX Filter then executes Specifying an advance
236. rue Settings are And Pass Drop Setting Description And Instructs Ethernet driver to continue with the next simple expression if the expression condi tion is satisfied Two or more simple expressions are AN Ded together to form a complex expres sion Pass Instructs Ethernet driver to accept the frame for default further processing and pass the frame up to the bridging layer the frame is not discarded Drop Instructs Ethernet driver to reject the frame 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 55 SECTION 4 Configuration Values Use Values to enter pattern lists that contain byte patterns that match consecutive bytes in received Ethernet frames Settings for Values are referenced by the Valueld from the Expression Table The values to be used in a filter expression are as follows Value Id Filter expression values havethe following settings Value Id 0 Val ue Setting Description Value Id An identifier used by an expression in the Expres sion Table The range is O default to 255 All values with the same identifier are considered to be in the same list When used in an expression that allows only one value that is LT LE GE or GT only the first value in the list is used Value One of the values to be compared The range is 8 hexadecimal pairs 4 56 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION4 Configuration Bridging Bridging options are Bridge Priority 1 Status Enabl ed
237. s psEntry 13 pslsSecondaryCandi date 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE if secondary bridge port candi dates psEntry 14 psSecondaryUni Floodi ng 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE for secondary bridge ports which require unicast flooding psEntry 15 psSecondaryMultiFlooding OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE for secondary bridge ports which require multicast flooding psEntry 16 psi sRadio OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE for radio ports psEntry 17 psPendEnabl ed 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TRUE if the port supports pending messages psEntry 18 G 40 6710 Access PointUser s Guide APPENDIXG MIB portStats OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER ninterfaces 4 pstcTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF PSTCEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R port state variables portStats 4 pstcEntry OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX PSTCEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX pstcPort pstcTable 1 PSTCEntry 5 SEQUENCE pstcPort NTEGER pstcl nOWLPkts C
238. s 17 nControl OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER norandNET 105 power Up OB ECT IDENTIFIER nControl 1 pwr Power UpCount OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON power up count powerUp 1 pwrNextPowerUpTi me OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Ti meTi cks ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Next power up time Used to reboot the device powerUp 2 softwareDownLoad OBJECT IDENTIFIER nControl 2 sdStartTi me OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Ti meTi cks ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The amount of time to delay before beginning the software download softwareDownLoad 1 G 72 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB sdServerlpAddress 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I pAddress ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON TFTP server IP address softwareDownLoad 2 sdScriptFilename 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 80 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Download script filename May include path softwareDownLoad 3 sdStatus OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER sdPendi ng sdSTStopped sdi nProcess sdTermi nated sdSuccess sdError pwr NPUT tftpError OO 1 C Cn R CO n2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Status of the current software download softwareDownLoad 4 sdErrorString OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 40 ACCESS
239. s Status Hello Period omde 00 00 00 00 00 Enabled 2 Seconds omdpxma 00 00 00 00 00 Enabled 2 Seconds omdflca 09 46 19 01 0a Enabled 1 Second omduhfb 01 55 b2 b3 90 lt Enabled gt lt 2 Seconds gt omdi p 00 00 00 00 00 lt Enabled gt lt 2 Seconds gt Because the system software autosenses the type of radio option installed in each port your screen displays only the ports for the installed radios The following chart defines options in the Name column Option Description omde Ethernet port omdpxma or omdpxmb WLIF Proxim 2 4 GHz radio port omdflca or omdfl cb Falcon 900 MHz radio port omduhfb S UHF radio port omdip OWL IP port IP tunneling Select a port to display its options Na me Depends on the port MAC Address 00 c0 b2 00 00 00 Status Enabl ed Hello Period 2 Seconds Ethernet WLI F Fal con UHF OWL IP 4 38 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION4 Configuration Name MAC Address Status and Hello Period appear for all ports The remaining options appear as follows Ethernet Appears if you selected omde Options start on page 4 41 WLIF Appears if you selected omdpxma or omdpxmb and a WLIF radio is installed in either PC card slot Options start on page 4 60 Falcon Appears if you selected omdflca or omdflcb and a 900 MHz radiois installed in either PC card slot Options star
240. s and wireless links between access points hello messages are used to maintain the spanning tree On wireless links hellos also serve as beacon messages to synchronize communications with power managed stations Settings for Hello Period are 1 Second 2 Seconds 3 Seconds The hello period can be 1 or 2 seconds default on 900 MHz or S UHF radio links A 1 second hello period requires the wireless station to wake up more often which increases battery usage However a 1 second hello period can reduce the delay before a pending message is received For most installations the default 2 seconds is recommended The Ethernet hello period can be set to 2 or 3 seconds 4 40 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Ethernet Options Use Ethernet to set Ethernet port options OWL Frame Type DI X Cable Type Auto Detect gt Static Addresses Normal RX Filter Advanced RX Filter Bridging OWL Frame Type OWL Frame Type is the Ethernet type for communication among access points open wireless LAN frames Settings are Setting Description DIX default Adds DIX Ethernet 2 0 header to open wireless LAN frames DIX is the default because it adds less overhead to the wireless data SNAP Adds an 802 3 SNAP header to open wireless LAN frames n some cases open wireless LAN frames must be encapsulated in SNAP frames 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 41 SECTION 4 Configuration C
241. s used to filter unicast frames on the ethernet port brgState 26 bsMultiFilterExpr OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Multicast ethernet filter ID 0 255 If the ID is non zero it points to a user defined expression which is used to filter multicast frames on the ethernet port brgState 27 bridgeStats OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER nBridge 7 bstcRouteCount 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Total route table entries bridgeStats 3 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 69 APPENDIXG M B bstcChildCount OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Number of attached children bridgeStats 4 bstcChildApCount OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Number of attached AP children bridgeStats 5 bstcRemoteCount 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Non OWL bridge table entries bridgeStats 6 bstcPrimaryCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Distribution LAN bridge table entries bridgeStats 7 bstcl nboundCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Inbound bridge table entries bridgeStats 8 bstcSecondaryCount OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandat
242. scriptions File Directory name lists the names of all files currently loaded in FLASH seg is the segment in which the boot file is loaded R indicates the RAM segment type is thetype of file E for executable boot file D for data length is the file size in bytes date and time arethe date and time the file was created ver is the file version number in the format vxx xx You should use the F d command often to ensure that the correct version of FLASH file USTART29 BIN isin the active boot segment If the active segment contains no files when you reboot the access point the unit enters the ROM command monitor and you lose the ability to Telnet to it during this session In this case you must access the unit through its DIAG port to correct the problem Fdel Command EXAMPLE F del deletes the file name from the access point file system When you delete a file it is marked as invalid but remains in the file system To reclaim the space from a deleted file you must erase the segment in which the file resides The command s format is File fdel file name This command erases the file USTART29 BIN saved in the inactive boot drive File fdel ib USTART29 BIN 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 7 SECTION 5 Software Download Fe Command Feerases files in a specified segment of FLASH memory Once you have erased the files you can restore them only by reloading them from another source T
243. segments except the file contents are stored in RAM and the segment s contents are lost when you reboot the access point The RAM segment is limited to a maximum of 4096 bytes It is used to hold small script files during the software download process When you view the file directory the program currently executing displays as if it were in the RAM segment This program however is not really a part of the RAM segment You cannot delete or erase it and TF TP commands cannot read or writetoit It displays as part of the file directory so you can determine which version of software is running Segment Names You must enter a segment for most access point file system commands You can type the numeric digits 1 2 3 or 4 corresponding to the respective file segments or you can use the following mnemonics the access point translates them to a segment number Mnemonic Description AB Active boot segment IB Inactive boot segment AD Active data segment ID Inactive data segment RAM RAM segment 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 3 SECTION 5 Software Download File Names EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 Several file system commands require you to enter file names You can precede file names by a segment number or name followed by a colon AB USTART29 BIN refers to the file USTART29 BIN in the active boot segment segment 1 or 2 1 US TART29 BIN refers to the file US TART29 BIN in segment 1 If you omit the segme
244. ses with the access point Use NoFlooding or Disabled if wire less stations do not need to respond to ARPs ARP server converts ARPs from multicast to the unicast address of the destination sta tion If the destination address is unknown the initial ARP request is not forwarded If the requesting device retries the ARP request second and subsequent ARP re quests are forwarded ARP requests from wireless stations are flooded inbound Delay Flooding is the preferred option when wireless stations should respond to ARPs but are not capable of registering their IP addresses with the access point ARP server converts ARPs from multicast to the unicast address of destination station If the destination address is unknown the ARP request is flooded according to the mul ticast flood level settings ARP requests from wireless stations are flooded inbound Normal Flooding is useful when wireless stations need to respond to ARP requests but are not capable of registering IP address es with the access point Normal Flooding sends more unnecessary ARPs over wireless links then delay flooding Normal Flooding does not introduce occasional delays in ARP responses as Delay Flooding does 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 37 SECTION 4 Configuration Ports Use Ports to define options for the access point s Ethernet port radio ports and OWL IP IP tunneling port The following sample screen shows all the ports Na me MAC Addres
245. sese Subnet Filtering 0c eee eee ee eee Password Security 0 0 cece eee eee eee Operation noc atid dete els ocd ceo be id indian Tunnel Origination 2 0 eanne Building the Spanning Tree Establishing and Maintaining Tunnels Redundancy i coepere aaa sae br Frame Forwarding 00ee cece eee eee eee QUEDOUNG 2 oue uti e Tende eee acd ud endet vs Inbound ge me a xe x en Station Mobility sssusa MobileIP Comparison ssssssseseeennns X 6710 Access PointUser s Guide QOUUUUCUUOU DOOONDADAUU 2 HM m LI I mmm TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI I L NNFFRFODUOONNAADBRWWNNNE mmmmmmm Pepe eee CONTENTS OWL IP Configuration Examples E 13 Example 1 Class C IP Addresses E 13 Step MM I EM E 15 sj OAM PN Pec E 15 Step EP E 15 Option A Unicast Addressing E 16 Option B Directed Broadcast E 16 Step 4 Set TX Filters sssseeese E 17 Example 2 Class B IP Address Using Subnetting E 19 Step T iere ene a area bbe wade e a Deane E 19 xj EDD E 19 SLODI obuia drei d Ln Mes A tate ate Ed bys E 21 Option A Unicast Addressing E 21 Option B Directed Broadcast E 21 Option C All Subnets Broadcast E 22 jo E 23 APPENDIX F Port and Cable Pin Outs seeeeennnn nnn F 1 DIAG Port Pin Outs
246. set This setting defines the offset in a received Ethernet frame to match the patterns The prompt is Range is 0 65535 A frame matches a pattern list if the masked bytes at the specified offset in the frame match any of the masked patterns in the pattern list The default is O Mask This setting indicates the bits that are significant at the specified offset The prompt is Range is 8 hex pairs The default is an empty string Thelength of this mask determines the number of characters compared at the offset If this field is an empty string the default the length of the field is determined by the longest value in the Value Table with the matching Value Id Op Op is a memory comparison operator in the following chart Operator Description LT Less than one value LE Less than or equal to one value EQ default Equal toany in the list NE Not equal to any in the list GE Greater than or equal to one value GT Greater than one value 4 54 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration Value Id The field at the specified offset is compared with values in the Value Table with the Valueld The prompt is Range is 0 255 The default is 0 When using a comparison operator that requires a single value LT LE GE and GT only the first value found will be compared Action The Action setting instructs the Ethernet driver and indicates what should happen when this expression is t
247. sgPendMsgMax OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Maxi mum pending message count pmsgEntry 5 pmsgPendMsgTotal 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Total pending message count pmsgEntry 6 pmsgPendMsgDiscards OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of pending messages in queue which were discarded before they could be delivered because the terminal s queue was full pmsgEntry 7 j pmsgPendRecOverflowErrors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of times that a terminal requested pending message services when no pending message records were available pmsgEntry 8 pmsgPendMsgOverflowErrors OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of times when the maxi mum number of stored messages per platform was exceeded pmsgEntry 9 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 51 APPENDIXG M B pmsgPendAgedRecCount OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of terminal records discarded due to maximum age 12 minutes pmsgEntry 10 pmsgPendAgedMsgCount 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of pending messages which were discarded due to maximum age defaul
248. sses to these access points unless a permanent lease is assigned and the access points are rebooted prior to configuring OWL IP Configure the Ethernet port cable type page 4 42 For the open wireless LAN frame type use DIX the default page 4 41 Configure the root priority in super root candidates to specify primary and fallback access points Set all other access points to root priority 0 Page 4 24 Set the highest root priority in the primary super root and lower root priorities in no more than two fallback super roots page 4 24 Secondary LANs or wireless access point If using WLIF 2 4 GHz radios configure the Slave radio setup in wireless access points or secondary LAN designated bridges page 4 61 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 93 SECTION 4 Configuration Table 4 1 Continued Configuration Guide z required step Z recommended step Simple Network 3 Additional Configuration Z N 4 94 Set LAN ID toa nonzero value page 4 23 Set Global Flooding parameters in super root candidates page 4 28 Configure the radio ports WLIF Security ID page 4 60 Node Type page 4 61 and Channel and Subchannel page 4 62 900 MHz Mode Channel page 4 74 S UHF Frequency page 4 76 Enable the Proxy ARP Server if IP wireless stations are being sup ported page 4 36 Set Ethernet filters to optimize frames forwarded to wireless stations page
249. sss 5 16 Reboot Command 0e eee 5 16 SDVars Command sss 5 17 ServerlpAddress 00 cts 5 18 ScriptFilename 0 cece eee 5 18 StartTime scie RR e xe ee ene 5 18 Status vos Leeds or een d aen cedes tu iss 5 19 CHECKPOINE nieto edere coit Senes 5 19 Terminate ss esci espocubrbr vac y Perte Debs 5 20 SetActivePointers 2 cece eee 5 21 NextPowerUpTime 0 0 0 5 21 ROM Command Monitor 00 cece eee eee 5 22 Starting the Command Monitor 5 22 Viewing ROM Commands usssssssss 5 23 B lrlsse tk ceXee ue Mery DET ge ey Ene Rn 5 23 EAS vedono bete ta ohana etu Certe A Ded top sts 5 23 pp EM 5 23 ER gate ceca teen ade cee Erb debe 5 24 NPWD oz ek rite at ee ea eet 5 24 SRZ a heed ea ee aan oh tea ed 5 24 PWD o reb eee P Dated Paw Eee 5 25 D e MEER 5 25 FE s Ml see scc Run Lene de ete 5 25 Fil ese eigen he een eee deere 5 26 ES S n oaths ont e atin E decided teta 5 26 EBScivsosdeboveip iM LA CL hu E 5 26 FRR fin icc eek Aatean A 5 26 FPC TS sau RETDPC EAR el ieee aoe 5 26 6710 Access PointUser s Guide vii CONTENTS viii hiuc Exiting the ROM Command Monitor Software Download Example sslssss Upgrading Through DIAG Port ss Starting the TFTP Server ccc cece eee ees Upgrading TFTP ClientS 0 ccc ee eee eens SECTION 6 Indicator Lights eese n n
250. ssus D 7 Figure D 2 Frequency Reuse sssssseesse D 8 Figure D 3 Increased System Throughput D 10 FigureE 1 Secondary LAN sssseeeese E 8 FigureE 2 OWL IP Tunnel seeeeeee E 8 Figure E 3 Example Class C Configuration E 14 Figure E 4 Example Class B Configuration E 20 TABLES Table 4 1 Configuration Guide sse 4 92 Table 6 1 ETHERNET Indicator Lights 6 2 Table 6 2 Error Mode Status Codes 6 3 Table 6 3 MODE Indicator Light 6 5 Table 6 4 NETWORK MODE Indicator Lights 6 5 Table 6 5 PCMCIA Indicator Lights 6 6 Table 6 6 DIAG Port Baud Rates ROM Mode 6 6 Table D 1 Coverage Prediction sssuue D 5 Table E 1 MobileIP Comparison E 13 Table G 1 MIB II Information sees G 3 Table G 2 MIB Information sese G 4 Table G 3 MIB Directory sssssssseeeeele G 7 Table G 4 products GROUP ssssseees G 8 Table G 5 hw GROUP 0 0 eee G 9 Table G 6 fsinfo GROUP cee eee eee eee G 10 6710 Access Point User s Guide xiii CONTENTS Table G 7 segment GROUP ccc cece eee ees G 10 Table G 8 dir GROUP 0 cece eee G 11 Table G 9 criticalErrors GROUP Lsssssss G 11 Table G 10 nifx GROUP 0 cece eee G 12 Table G 11 p
251. super root 4 25 Telnet session 3 6 through DHCP 4 20 unicast 4 42 4 84 Web browser 3 6 4 89 Advanced filtering 4 52 Advanced password 4 86 4 87 Advanced RX Filter 4 41 4 52 All 4 46 All Subnets address 4 84 E 22 E 23 Alternate Host Address E 6 And 4 55 Antenna regulations B 3 C 2 Antennas 900 MHz radio C 2 connectors B 6 INTERMECP adapter cable B 5 Model 2100 B 6 S UHF radio D 3 WLIF B 3 B 6 Index 1 INDEX Applying power 3 20 ARP Bootp server 4 21 broadcasting a request 4 21 converting multicast requests to unicast 4 36 DHCP server 4 21 flooding 4 36 menu option 4 36 minutes between requests 4 22 overview 2 7 server mode 4 23 4 36 TCP IP nodes 4 32 AT MIB family G 3 Attach mechanisms 2 6 Attach priority 4 76 4 78 AUI See also 10BASE5 thick Ethernet drop cable 3 4 menu option 4 42 port 2 18 3 13 F 2 AUTO 4 72 Auto ARP minutes 4 16 4 22 Auto detect 4 42 Awake time 4 25 4 26 4 27 B command 5 23 B routers E 3 Baud rate 4 4 4 5 5 24 Beacon frequency 4 69 4 70 Beacons 4 70 BFSK 4 72 BGP E 5 Binary Frequency Shift K eying 4 72 Boot segments activating 5 5 5 6 5 7 changing 5 30 copying file to 5 31 description 5 1 designating 5 26 displaying 5 6 erasing 5 8 5 15 5 31 finding executable file in 5 24 mnemonic 5 3 Boot segments Continued script file 5 14 storing files in 5 11 5 12 Bootp client 2 12
252. t Open System An NNL wirdess station is a terminal emulation station These stations use an optimized transport protocol for reli able operation in wireless environments An octet is a byte composed of eight bits An open systen comprises protocols and components that meet standards set by industry accepted governing bodies The standards ensure that when new protocols and compo nents are introduced into an existing system the protocols and components will meet the standards and be able to communicate with the existing system The OSI model is the basis for a system to communicate with any other sys tem The model is a framework of standards used to create protocol stacks and applications for networking applica tions Open Wireless LAN Node An open wirdess LAN nodeis any access point or wireless station that connects to the network using the 900 MHz or synthesized UHF radio option Glossary 6 6710 Access Point User s Guide GLOSSARY Outbound Frames Frames moving away from the distribution LAN are out bound Primary LAN See Distribution LAN Radio Network The radio network consists of radio enabled network devices and communication paths It is a group of fixed end devices and wireless stations in which each can communi cate with at least one other device through either a radio or wired Ethernet link Secondary Ethernet LANs are part of the radio network the distribution LAN is not part of the radio network
253. t 5 seconds pmsgEntry 11 j nSNMP OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER norandNET 11 vlConfig OBJ ECT IDENTIFIER nSNMP 1 Norand Community table defines the accepted community Strings and their access privileges The Community Table G 52 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB communi t yTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF CommunityEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The community table is used to define communities and their access privileges Norand s implementation of the community table has some special considerations 1 GETs and SETs to the community table can only be accomplished using the SUPER USER community string which Norand has defined 2 This SUPER USER community string or password is defined in the first row of the community table The communityName contained in the first row of the community table is always the SUPER USER community string This community string communityName may be modified 3 All rows of the community table are modifiable SET when using the SUPER USER community string However for the first row of the community table only the communityName object is modifiable This ensures that the SUPER USER will always have maxi mum access to the MIB data All other rows in the community Table are accessible as defined in the MIB definition 4 The SUPER USER and other default community string values can be found in Norand s User s Guide
254. t lt All gt 802 2 IPX Sockets lt Drop gt lt All gt 802 2 Other SAPs lt Drop gt lt All gt Default filter settings for SubTypes 1 are shown below Action SubType Value DI X ARP Drop lt DIX EtherType gt 08 06 SNAP ARP Drop lt SNAP EtherType gt 08 06 802 2 I PX RIP Drop 802 2 IPX Socket 04 51 802 2 I PX SAP Drop 802 2 IPX Socket 04 53 NNL Pass DI X EtherType 87 5b NETBI 0S Drop 802 2 SAP fo f0 Drop DIX IP TCP Port 00 00 Drop DIX IP TCP Port 00 00 Drop DIX IP TCP Port 00 00 Drop P TCP 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 85 SECTION 4 Configuration Security Options Use Security to set these passwords Password Uxx kkkkokkokkkeke Service Password Enabl ed Advanced Password ck e e een Password This option is the top level password you need to access the configuration menus The prompt is Range is 16 chars Enter 16 or fewer alphanumeric characters for this password It is case insensitive and can be any combination of letters numbers and symbols For security the password appears as asterisks on the screen Service Password ntermec maintains a service password so its Customer Response Center can configure this access point if necessary For example if you forget what the configuration menus top level password is the Customer Response Center can access the menus through the service password
255. t However attach priority is used in combination with other factors such as loading and signal strength and a station may attach to a lower priority access point that provides a better wireless link Stations ignore the attach priority when selecting between two access points with the same attach priority Attach Priority is useful when it is desirable to havea redundant network with some access points serving as standby units If the higher priority unit fails stations fall back to the lower priority unit within the same coverage area Attach Priority settings are Hi gh Medium Low Setting Description High High priority access point default Medium Medium priority access point Low Low priority access point 4 78 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION4 Configuration OWL IP Options NOTE Appendix E provides additional information about OWL IP and contains configuration examples Overview The OWL IP extension to the open wireless LAN architecture enables a wireless LAN installation to span multiple IP subnets OWL IP is an advanced capability that requires basic knowledge of I P addressing conventions and routing to configure and use You should review the following pages and Appendix E before using this capability OWL IP does the following Enables access points on different P subnets to belong tothe same wireless network Supports transparent roaming of wireless stations between access poi
256. t on page 4 74 UHF Appears if you selected omduhfb and a S UHF radio is installed in its PC card slot Options start on page 4 76 OWL IP Appears if you selected omdip Options start on page 4 79 Name The read only Name setting displays the driver name for the type of device occupying this communication port For example omde is the driver name for the Ethernet port The name is for internal system use MAC Address MAC Address is a read only option that displays the network address of the Ethernet port or radio port The access point automatically identifies the addresses of devices installed in or attached to its communication ports After you reconfigure and reboot the access point wait for the power up sequence to complete before you check the MAC address The proper address should appear after you reboot the access point If you do not wait for the access point to completely power up the MAC address may display all zeros However the access point should still operate normally 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 39 SECTION 4 Configuration Status The Status option sets the condition of the Ethernet port or radio port Settings are Enabl ed Disabled Setting Description Enabled default Port is available for use Disabled Port is not available for use Hello Period The hello period determines how frequently the access point broadcasts hello messages on the network On Ethernet link
257. t packet ptxgEntry 14 pms g OBJECT IDENTIFIER ninterfaces 6 pmsgTable OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF PmsgEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Pending Message Table pmsg 1 pmsgEntry OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX PmsgEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory INDEX pmsgPort pmsgTable 1 6710 Access Point User s Guide G 49 APPENDIXG M B PmsgEntry 5 SEQUENCE pmsgPort NTEGER pmsgPendRecCurrent Gauge pmsgPendRecMax NTEGER pmsgPendMsgCurrent Gauge pmsgPendMsgMax NTEGER pmsgPendMsgTotal Counter pmsgPendMsgDi scar ds Counter pmsgPendRecOverflowErrors Counter pmsgPendMsgOverflowErrors Counter pmsgPendAgedRecCount Counter pmsgPendAgedMsgCount Counter pms gPort OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R port ID 1 4 A number which uniquely indentifies the port pmsgEntry 1 pmsgPendRecCurrent OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Current terminal record count pmsgEntry 2 pms gPendRec Max OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX NTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Maxi mum terminal record count pmsgEntry 3 pmsgPendMsgCurrent OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Current pending message count pmsgEntry 4 G 50 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB pm
258. tAge INTEGER read 2 14 rtNodeld INTEGER read 2 15 rtAttachld INTEGER read 2 16 rtAttachTime TimeTicks read 2 1 7 rtApEaddr PhysAddress read 2 1 8 rtHopAddrLen INTEGER read 2 1 9 rtHopAddr16 INTEGER read G 18 6710 Access PointUser s Guide APPENDIXG MIB Table G 17 Continued rt GROUP Device Route Table norand manage norandN et nBridge rt x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 17 2 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 2 1 10 rtHopE addr PhysAddress read 2 1 11 rtl SBound INTEGER read 2 1 12 rtlsRemote INTEGER read 2 1 13 rtl sChild INTEGER read 2 1 14 rtlsAp INTEGER read 2 1 15 rtl sDistributed INTEGER read 2 1 16 rtl sRemoteL an INTEGER read 2 1 17 rtNS INTEGER read 2 1 18 rtNR INTEGER read Table G 18 brg GROUP Device Bridge Table norand manage norandN et nBridge brg x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 17 3 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 2 1 1 brgDestination PhysAddress read 2 1 2 brgPort INTEGER read 2 1 3 brgAge INTEGER read 2 1 4 brgType INTEGER read 2 15 brglsPermanent INTEGER read 2 1 6 brgTimestamp TimeTicks read 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 19 APPENDIXG MIB Table G 19 addr GROUP Address Table norand manage norandN et nBridge addr x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 2 17 4 x OID Object Name Object Type Access 2 1 1 addrDestination PhysAddress read 2 1 2 addrAge INTEGER read 2 1 3 addrNodeld INTEGER read 2 1 4 addrAlias DisplayString read 2 15 addrDev
259. tStats Port Statistics ptxq Port Transmit Queue pmsg Pending Message Services SNMP Version 1 Configuration community Community Table trapTarget Trap Target Table Bridging Parameters rt Route Table brg Bridge Table addr Address Table brgstate Bridge State Information bridgeStats Bridge Statistics Control Groups powerU p Power U p Objects softwareDownLoad Software Download APPENDIXG MIB Group Summary G 8 G 9 G 10 G 10 G 11 G 11 G 12 G 13 G 14 G 15 G 16 G 17 G 17 G 18 G 19 G 20 G 20 G 22 G 23 G 23 MIB Definition G 24 G 24 G 25 G 26 G 28 G 30 G 32 G 36 G 41 G 46 G 49 G 52 G 55 G 56 G 61 G 63 G 64 G 69 G 72 G 72 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 7 APPENDIXG M B MIB Outline Product OIDs This group contains an Object I Dentification OI D for each INTERMEC device Table G 4 products GROUP Device Products norand manage products x 1 3 6 1 4 1 469 1000 1 x OID Object Name Object Type Access i ap6710 OBJ ECT ID Not Applicable N A 2 gw4030 OBJ ECTID N A 3 wnas OBJ ECTID N A 4 ts6950 OBJ ECTID N A 5 gwap6910 OBJ ECTID N A 6 uap2100 OBJECTID N A 7 msd6710 OBJECTID N A G 8 6710 Access PointUser s Guide NOTE APPENDIXG MIB S ystem Information The following groups contain system level objects describing hardware and file system configuration properties The groups also contain information about c
260. tact your Sales Representative for information about the antenna kit most suitable for your installation FCC and DOC regulations require that qualified personnel install remote antennas Contact your Sales Representative for more information Medium Gain Patch The medium gain patch is a circular polarized antenna that mounts on the wall The antenna is well suited for office areas where low profile is necessary Circular polarization also works well in areas with many reflections The following chart lists kit part numbers 6710 Access PointUser s Guide B 3 WLIF Specifications and Antennas Cable Length Kit Part Number 10 feet 203 423 001 20 feet 203 423 002 30 feet 203 423 003 Medium Gain Collinear Dipole The medium gain collinear dipole is a linear polarized antenna that works best in semi open areas such as loading dock bays open high ceiling office environments and in areas where penetration through several racks or a single office wall is required The following chart lists kit part numbers Cable Length Kit Part Number 10 feet 203 423 004 20 feet 203 423 005 30 feet 203 423 006 High Gain Collinear Dipole The high gain collinear dipole is a linear polarized antenna that works similar to the medium gain collinear dipole except it has higher gain can cover larger open areas and can penetrate through more racks This antenna should only be used when it can reduce the number of access points in the system The fo
261. ters ARP tables 4 22 auto ARP minutes 4 22 B routers E 3 Class B addresses 4 17 filtering example 4 48 4 50 GRE frames 4 83 infinite leases 4 21 IP X 4 48 4 50 menu option 4 16 4 18 obtaining address through DHCP 4 20 Routers Continued OWL IP configuring routing 4 83 frames forwarded E 5 frames not forwarded E 4 in sample network E 13 E 19 installation limitations E 2 overview E 1 redundancy E 10 roaming across boundaries E 1 E 3 Telnet session 4 6 updating routing tables 4 22 Web browser session 4 88 Routing Information Protocol E 5 Rubber feet 2 18 Run File command 5 25 5 26 Run Flash Boot File command 5 23 5 24 S S UHF radio antenna connector D 3 attach mechanisms 2 6 channelization D 1 countries D 2 data rates D 1 D 3 D 4 designated bridging 4 57 dual radio options 2 9 file name 4 76 5 1 5 6 frequencies D 1 frequency and separation guidelines D 10 increasing system through put D 8 installation guidelines D 5 installing multiple access points D 6 PC card 3 19 single access point D 6 menu options 4 76 output power D 1 part numbers D 2 predicting coverage D 5 range D 1 receiver sensitivity D 1 recommended flooding level 4 36 S UHF radio Continued regulatory compliances D 2 reusing the frequency D 7 site license D 4 specifications D 1 technology D 4 transaction rates D 4 D 6 D 8 transmit power D 1 whip antennas
262. tes a probable hardware malfunction associated with the LOBASE T port In most cases the unit continues to operate normally but the error condition still exists This failure occurs when the access point timer circuit malfunctions If a timer er ror occurs the unit no longer functions Theright STATUS light is labeled MODE It indicates the current status of the access point Table 6 3 6 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide Status ON BLINK OFF SECTION6 Indicator Lights Table 6 3 MODE Indicator Light Indication Unit is not functional and is locked up Unit is in network mode the normal operating condition Unit is in command mode It enters this mode when it detects a key press from an attached PC beforeit enters the boot mode or when it detects an incoming signal from an attached modem NETWORK MODE Lights NETWORK MODE indicator lights show the status of the access point s network link The lights are labeled R LINK left indicator and W LINK right indicator They work together to indicate the type of network link the access point has established Table 6 4 shows links OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON Table 6 4 NETWORK MODE Indicator Lights R LINK W LINK Network Link Description OFF ON BLINK OFF ON BLINK Nonetwork link established unit is not connected to a network or is reconfigur ing Unit is attached to network through an Ethernet port Unit is attached to netwo
263. the SNMP agent The MIB may be ordered separately and compiled for any SNMP network management platform Additional capabilities are supported in the OWLView network management application for HP OpenView Appendix G MIB contains the 6710 Access Point MIB Consult the following documentation for more information on network management NORAND Open Wirdess LAN with HP OpenView for Windows User s Guide 961 051 009 OWLView for HP OpenView for UNIX User s Guide 961 051 011 OWLView for HP OpenView for Windows User s Guide 961 051 010 Sample Configuration Figure 2 3 shows a sample network configuration It also shows access points providing additional coverage and wireless links to secondary Ethernet LANs NOTE Consult Appendix D S UHF Specifications and Antennas for network configuration limitations for S UHF systems 2 14 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Terminal Emulation Gateway LAN Server Distribution LAN 6710 Access Point 6710 Access Point Designated Bridge PEN KEY 6400 notebook WLIF Secondary Ethernet LAN Computer Desktop PEN KEY 6400 Computer Figure 2 3 Sample Network Configuration 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 2 15 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Components Figure 2 4 shows access point components described on the fol
264. the file name is set equal tothe file name embedded in the file header This command line gets file US TART29 BIN from a directory on a PC server with IP address 1 2 3 4 and stores the file in the access point s inactive boot segment File gt tftp get 1 2 3 4 c flash ap ustart29 BIN i b This command line gets file US TART29 BIN from segment 2 on the access point server with IP address 1 2 3 4 and puts the file in segment 1 on the access point client File tftp get 1 2 3 4 2 ustart29 bin 1 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 5 11 SECTION 5 EXAMPLE Software Download Put Use Put on an access point dient to copy a file to the server a PC or another access point The format is File tftp put ip address foreign file name local file name ip address is the IP address of the server or which stands for the value of the Serverl pAddress variable described on page 5 18 foreign file name is the name of the file as it will appear on the server The file name can contain directory path information and must be in the format required by the operating system running on the server local file name is the name of the file to be sent from the access point dient This command takes boot file US TART29 BIN saved in the active boot drive on the access point client and stores it in the active boot segment on the access point server with IP address 1 2 3 4 File tftp put 1 2 3 4 ustart29 bi
265. the Configuration Guide The configuration guide in Table 4 1 summarizes the necessary steps to set up an open wireless LAN The left hand column provides basic setup information for a simple network using 6710 Access Points on a single Ethernet segment This type of network may contain bridges or hubs but may not contain OWL IP links through routers secondary LANs or wireless access points The right hand column provides additional steps for more complex networks that indude these additional components Table 4 1 Configuration Guide z required step Z recommended step Simple Network Advanced Functions 1 Configuration Planning z Select which access points will be z Secondary LANs and OWL IP primary and fallback super root Select which access points will be candidates page 4 24 primary and fallback designated bridges pages 4 57 and 4 79 4 92 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION 4 Configuration Table 4 1 Continued Configuration Guide z required step Z recommended step Simple Network 2 Preliminary Configuration Before Installation Z Set LAN ID toa nonzero value page 4 23 Advanced Functions Through DIAG Port z Configure access points with IP address configuration page 4 16 or DHCP server name page 4 20 OWL IP Configure P addresses in access points serving as super root candidates or OWL IP desig nated bridge candidates DHCP may not be used to assign addre
266. the destination o rtEntry 7 G 58 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB rtHopAddrLen OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER twoByte 2 sixByte 6 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC D address length 2 or 6 A MAC D entity may use either 16 bit locally assigned addresses or 48 bit 802 addresses rtEntry 8 rtHopAddr 16 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 16 bit MAC D address if rtHopAddrLen is twoByte 2 rtEntry 9 rtHopEaddr OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX PhysAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON 48 bit MAC D address if rtHopAddrLlen is sixByte 6 s rtEntry 10 rti sBound OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON True if the destination is fully attached and the path can be used to forward data rtEntry 11 rti sRemote 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON True if the destination is a non OWL node rtEntry 12 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 59 APPENDIX G M B rtlsChild OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON True if the destination is a child node rtEntry 13 rtlsAp OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandator
267. ting Description Pass lt Unlisted gt Action Defines how the frame is processed Pass Frame is passed to the bridging function default for further processing Drop Frame is discarded 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 4 45 SECTION 4 Configuration Setting Description Scope Defines whether the action applies to all frames of this type or is restricted to selected subtypes Unlisted Applies only to subtypes that are not default configured under SubTypes 1 or SubTypes 2 All Applies to all frames of this type SubTypes 1 and SubTypes 2 settings for this frame type are ignored SubTypes 1 The predefined subtypes in the SubTypes 1 menu provide preconfigured filters that are useful in many networks The values for these subtypes cannot be changed Subtypes are Action SubType Value DI X ARP Pass lt DIX EtherType gt 08 06 SNAP ARP Pass lt SNAP EtherType gt 08 06 802 2 IPX RIP Pass 802 2 I PX Socket 04 51 802 2 I PX SAP Pass lt 802 2 1PX Socket gt 04 53 NNL Pass DI X EtherType 87 5b NETBI 0S Pass 802 2 SAP fo fo 1 User defined subtypes through 16 User defined subtypes User Defined Subtypes in SubTypes 1 and SubTypes 2 The value under user defined subtypes allow individual protocol ports sockets or SAPs to be specified for each of the listed frametypes The filter takes action if either the source or destination fields in the frame
268. tion Wireless devices with the WLIF radio can operate in most areas that allow use of spread spectrum wireless communications at 2 4 GHz induding Australia and countries in North and South America Europe and Asia Contact a Sales Representative for current information about countries in which the product is approved for use and countries in which submission for type approval is planned Part Numbers The following chart lists RM 180 part numbers RM180 Part Number Compatibility and Comments 245 149 100 Kit used with 219 008 001 219 008 001 RM 180 only Used with 245 149 100 for PC card slot 1 or 2 245 149 105 Kit used with 219 009 001 219 009 001 RM 180 only for J apan Used with for PC card slot 1 or 2 245 149 105 B 2 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXB WLIF Specifications and Antennas Antenna Regulations For WLIF systems regulations require the antenna and antenna connector on the access point to be unique and not commercially available This ensures that the RF output of the radio stays within the limits specified by the regulating agencies Whip Antenna The standard WLIF whip antenna can be used throughout Europe Its part number is 805 486 001 Remote Antenna Kits NOTE Remote antenna kits allow a variety of antenna configurations for a radio installed in the access point to be located up to 30 feet from the access point All remote antenna kits include a mounting bracket Con
269. tion The access point provides a dual bank file system with one active bank and one inactive bank It operates from the active bank allowing software upgrades to be stored in the inactive bank This enables upgrades to be loaded while the access point is operating The upgrade can be started immediately after downloading by swapping the active and inactive banks and rebooting The access point can also be programmed to load the new software at a later time such as after all access points have been upgraded or during a time of little system activity TFTP Client and Server Software downloads are accomplished using the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP another member of the P suite Each access point contains a TFTP dient and server The TFTP dient allows the access point to obtain software updates from a TFTP server The server can be an access point configured with the TFTP server enabled or another network workstation with TFTP server capability Scripting The access point supports a scripting capability that automates most of the software download process Scripts can be uploaded to the access point through Telnet or SNMP 6710 Access PointUser s Guide 2 13 SECTION 2 Features and Functional Overview Network Management The access point is instrumented for network management with variables defined in the Management nformation Base MIB The MIB is SNMP V1 compliant Management information can be accessed through
270. ttings E 3 E 6 example E 17 in designated bridges 4 81 in super root 4 81 permanent filters E 4 restrictions E 4 subnet E 6 preconfigured filters 4 46 protocols that cannot be fil tered 4 45 FLASH copying files to 5 26 definition Glossary 3 designating segments 5 26 directories 5 4 5 6 5 23 downloading to 5 4 5 29 erasing segments 5 8 5 25 5 26 redefining default file seg ments 5 26 USTART29 BIN 5 1 5 6 5 7 5 9 version 1 1 version supported with TFTP Y modem batch protocol down load 5 23 Flat panel antenna B 6 Flood register and inbound setting 4 34 4 35 4 36 and outbound to secondaries setting 4 30 4 34 4 35 4 36 menu option 4 57 4 59 OWL IP 4 81 Flooding ARPs 4 36 checklist 4 31 flood register 4 36 4 59 6710 Access Point User s Guide INDEX Flooding Continued frames with unknown des tinations 4 29 global 4 28 4 59 inbound 4 28 multicast frames 4 28 no flooding 4 37 4 59 outbound to secondaries 4 29 outbound to stations 4 30 overview 2 6 2 9 OWL IP 4 81 E 4 E 6 E 9 Proxy ARP Server 2 7 to secondary LAN 4 59 unicast frames 4 28 Forwarding Glossary 3 Forwarding database attach mechanisms 2 6 description 2 5 filtering 2 9 functional overview 2 5 OWL IP port 2 11 Proxy ARP 2 7 FPC f s command 5 25 5 26 FPD command 5 25 5 26 FPE command 5 25 5 27 FPX command 5 25 5 27 FR command 5 23 5 24 Frag Ac
271. umber 5 feet 203 449 002 18 feet 203 449 003 36 feet 203 449 001 50 feet 203 449 004 75 feet 203 449 005 100 feet 203 449 006 6710 Access PointUser s Guide D 3 APPENDIXD S UHF Specifications and Antennas Site License Operation of S UHF requires a site license in the United States and some other countries Consult Sales Administration in the United States or the appropriate National Regulatory Agency outside the United States for information about the appropriate application process Technology S UHF technology provides an extended range solution for installations requiring small populations of terminal emulation stations operating at low transaction rates In regions where 900 MHz operation is permitted United States Canada Australia and several countries in Central and South America S UHF is recommended only for the following Sites in excess of 500 000 square feet 50 000 square meters Sites requiring 10 or fewer terminal emulation stations System transaction rates less than 1 per second S UHF may be appropriate for larger sites on an individual basis Consult your Sales Representative for more information Transaction Rates S UHF performance is sensitive to transaction rate and terminal count Theinstallation guideline is 32 or fewer wireless stations per frequency The following chart shows guidelines for multiple frequency installations D 4 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXD
272. ure that a power outlet is within 6 feet of the access point An uninterruptable power supply is recommended when the ac power system is not reliable Ensure that LAN and ac cables can reach the access point after you install it Leave sufficient room around the access point so you can easily attach and remove cables Do not locate an access point with the S UHF radio option in a computer room RF emissions from the higher speed processors in current generation computers may reduce system range Mounting the Access Point You can mount the access point horizontally on a tabletop vertically on a wall or post or on the ceiling Horizontal Tabletop Mount 1 Removethe mounting bracket from the bottom of the access point The bracket is not needed for a tabletop installation 2 Setthe access point in position Theunit rests securely on four rubber feet that keep it from slipping out of place 3 Makeall Ethernet connections See Connecting to Ethernet on page 3 10 4 Makeall power connections See Applying Power on page 3 20 5 Watch the indicator lights to verify that the access point is working properly See Section 6 I ndicator Lights for help 3 8 6710 Access Point User s Guide NOTE SECTION3 Installation Vertical and Ceiling Mounts SeeFigure 3 6 and the procedure following it If mounting the access point on a hollow wall secure the mounting plate to a 3 4 thick plywood base by four 1 X 1
273. urity for the 6710 Access Point 6710 Access PointUser s Guide G 5 APPENDIXG M B MIB Il Notes System Group Interfaces Group IP Forwarding Three fields in the MIB II system group are writable Thosefields are sysContact sysName and sysLocation Itis important that these values be preserved in case the 6710 Access Point is powered off and on or rebooted The following lists the number of characters for each field that will be preserved in the event of a power off and on or reboot sysContact 31 characters SysN ame 31 characters sysLocation 39 characters The ifTable ifAdminStatus objectis read write accessible However this functionality has not been enabled IP Forwarding is disabled for this release of the 6710 Access Point Therefore the MIB I ipForwarding object is not changeable MIB Directory The following pages describe the various groups the 6710 Access Point supports Table G 3 lists groups their meaning and page numbers where each groups table summary and definitions appear G 6 6710 Access PointUser s Guide Table G 3 MIB Directory Group Meaning Product OIDs products INTERMECR Products System Information hw Hardware nformation fsinfo File System Information segment File Segment I nformation dir Software Directory Listing criticalErrors Critical Errors I nformation Interface I nformation nifx Norand Extensions to Interfaces Table portState Port State Information por
274. word menu Enter the password The default password is CR52401OWL must be upper case passwd gt fe 1 Erase FLASH segment 1 passwd gt x Exit the password menu ap gt fx 1 Download the new FLASH file into segment 1 passwd gt fb 1 Change the boot segment number from 2 in this example the active boot segment to 1 ap gt fr Run the new FLASH boot file by restarting the access point 2 After the access point reboots and is running in FLASH mode use the Fd command to display the file directory and verify that the new version of FLASH is in segment 1 3 Ensure that this access point has a valid IP address Change the address if necessary and remember what itis You need the IP address to configure TFTP dients in other access points 5 30 6710 Access Point User s Guide SECTION5 Software Download Starting the TFTP Server 1 Configure the access point that you just upgraded to be the TFTP server by typing File gt tftp server start To check the status of the TFTP server type File gt tftp server log If the server is active its response is The TFTP server is running Upgrading TFTP Clients The following procedure assumes that you are downloading USTART29 BIN into an inactive boot segment and the 900 MHz radio s data file into an inactive data segment 1 Command File gt fe ib File gt fe id After you have started the access point server establish a TELNET session with the access point to b
275. xEntry 3 nifxlnOverruns OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of received frames discarded because the frame could not be queued for the MAC D task nifxEntry 4 nifxlnHWOverruns OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of received frames discarded due to hardware overruns nifxEntry 5 nifxlnUcastDPkts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of received unicast frames successfully delivered to the MAC D task nifxEntry 6 nifxlnNUcastDPkts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of received multicast frames successfully delivered to the MAC D task nifxEntry 7 G 34 6710 Access Point User s Guide APPENDIXG MIB nifxlnLenErrors 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number received frames with length errors nifxEntry 8 nifxExcessiveDeferrals OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of aborted transmissions due to excessive deferrals nifxEntry 9 ni f xI nNetI DDi scar ds 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON The number of received frames discarded because the LAN ID did not match nifxEntry 10
276. y DESCRI PTI ON True if the destination is an AP rtEntry 14 rtlsDistri buted OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON True if the path is through a distributed AP root node only rtEntry 15 rti sRemoteLan 0BJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER true 1 false 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON True if the destination is a remote LAN rtEntry 16 rtNS OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX I NTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R send sequence number for terminal nodes The 16 bit 0 65535 sequence number of the last OWL data request PDU sent to the destination rtEntry 17 G 60 6710 Access Point User s Guide brg APPENDIXG MIB rtNR OBJ ECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON MAC R receive sequence number for terminal nodes The 16 bit 0 65535 sequence number of the last OWL data request PDU received fromthe destination rtEntry 18 OB ECT IDENTIFIER nBridge 3 The BRG Table Table Definition brgTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF BRGEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRI PTI ON Each entry in this table provides bridge information for child nodes which are reachable via a bridge brg 2 Row Definition brgEntry OB ECT TYPE SYNTAX BRGEntry ACCESS not accessible STA

Intermec 6710 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents